Suite help files SEAMONKEY_2_2b1_BUILD1 SEAMONKEY_2_2b1_BUILD2 SEAMONKEY_2_2b1_RELEASE SEAMONKEY_2_2b2_BUILD1 SEAMONKEY_2_2b2_BUILD2 SEAMONKEY_2_2b2_RELEASE SEAMONKEY_2_2b3_BUILD1 SEAMONKEY_2_2b3_RELEASE
authorMarcelo Poli <mpoli@lt24.zzn.com>
Fri, 17 Jun 2011 01:48:10 -0300
changeset 531 b79243d419add48e789e3d8dd1becd3c23ab0626
parent 530 d25ef960b5e5f9109d920d631c335506cc2ffbe7
child 532 e1903c822a0bdd04893e79f78ea2d0661a1e26d4
child 533 b911b0590cf70a1a7dddb9bc30db015be6438528
child 537 4c0c4d5335f48f74d438b937e804694a6a541a2d
child 541 7fc3e3904bb27ea3d53207a291fa80752f867a2c
push id1
push usersledru@mozilla.com
push dateThu, 04 Dec 2014 21:47:06 +0000
Suite help files
suite/chrome/common/help/cert_dialog_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/certs_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/certs_prefs_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/composer_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/cs_priv_prefs_popup.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/customize_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/developer_tools.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/forieusers.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/glossary.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/help-glossary.rdf
suite/chrome/common/help/help-index1.rdf
suite/chrome/common/help/help-indexAZ.rdf
suite/chrome/common/help/help-win.rdf
suite/chrome/common/help/helpFileLayout.css
suite/chrome/common/help/help_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/images/anchor-in-doc.gif
suite/chrome/common/help/images/broken.gif
suite/chrome/common/help/images/bullets.gif
suite/chrome/common/help/images/columns.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/composer_icon.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/help_nav.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/help_print.gif
suite/chrome/common/help/images/image.gif
suite/chrome/common/help/images/link.gif
suite/chrome/common/help/images/locationbar.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_flag.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_flag_column.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_junk_column.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_alert.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_trayicon.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_quicksearch.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_read.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_read_column.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_unread.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/numbers.gif
suite/chrome/common/help/images/offline.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/online.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/personalbar.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/reload.gif
suite/chrome/common/help/images/search.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/search_personal_toolbar.gif
suite/chrome/common/help/images/sidebar-advanced.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/sidebar.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/tabbed_browsing_bar.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/table.gif
suite/chrome/common/help/images/task_mail.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/task_newmail.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/taskbar-ab.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/taskbar.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/threadbutton.png
suite/chrome/common/help/images/web-links.png
suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_account_settings.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_addressbooks.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_blogs_and_feeds.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_getting_started.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_newsgroups.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_offline.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_organizing.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_preferences.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_security.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_using_mail.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/nav_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/page_info_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/passwords_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/privacy_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/privsec_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/profiles_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_composer.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_mailnews.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_navigator.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/ssl_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/suite-toc.rdf
suite/chrome/common/help/suitehelp.rdf
suite/chrome/common/help/using_certs_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/using_priv_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/validation_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/welcome_help.xhtml
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/cert_dialog_help.xhtml
@@ -0,0 +1,491 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>Certificate Information and Decisions</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<div class="boilerPlate">This document is provided for your information only.
+  It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security of
+  your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however,
+  address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a
+  recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and security
+  protection on the Internet.</div>
+
+<h1 id="certificate_information_and_decisions">Certificate Information and
+  Decisions</h1>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use various windows displayed at different times by
+  Certificate Manager. The additional information given here appears when you click
+  the Help button in one of those windows.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#certificate_viewer">Certificate Viewer</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#choose_security_device">Choose Security Device</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#encryption_key_copy">Encryption Key Copy</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#certificate_backup">Certificate Backup</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#user_identification_request">User Identification Request</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#new_certificate_authority">New Certificate Authority</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#web_site_certificates">Website Certificates</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="certificate_viewer">Certificate Viewer</h2>
+
+<p>The Certificate Viewer displays information about a certificate you selected
+  in one of the Certificate Manager tabs. The General tab summarizes
+  information about who issued the certificate, its verification status, what
+  the certificate can be used for, and so on. The Details tab provides complete
+  details on the certificate&apos;s contents.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not currently viewing the Certificate Viewer, follow these
+  steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Privacy &amp; Security category, click Certificates. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy &amp; Security to expand
+    the list.)</li>
+  <li>Click Manage Certificates.</li>
+  <li>Click the tab for the type of certificate whose details you want to
+    view.</li>
+  <li>Select the certificate whose details you want to view.</li>
+  <li>Click View.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#general_tab">General Tab</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#details_tab">Details Tab</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="general_tab">General Tab</h3>
+
+<p>When you first open the Certificate Viewer, the General tab displays several
+  kinds of information about the selected certificate:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>This certificate has been verified for the following
+    uses</strong>: See
+    <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_verification">certificate verification</a>
+    for a discussion of how the Certificate Manager verifies certificates. Uses
+    can include any of the following:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>SSL Client Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to identify
+        you to websites.</li>
+      <li><strong>SSL Server Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to identify
+        a website server to browsers.</li>
+      <li><strong>Email Signer Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to
+        identify you for the purposes of digitally signing email messages.</li>
+      <li><strong>Email Recipient Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to
+        identify someone else, for example so you can send that person
+        encrypted email.</li>
+      <li><strong>Status Responder Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to
+        identify an online status responder that uses the Online Certificate
+        Status Protocol (OCSP) to check the validity of certificates. For more
+        information about OCSP, see
+        <a href="validation_help.xhtml">Validation Settings</a>.</li>
+      <li><strong>SSL Certificate Authority</strong>: Certificate used to
+        identify a certificate authority&mdash;that is, a service that issues
+        certificates for use as identification over computer networks.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Issued To</strong>: Summarizes the following information about
+    the certificate:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Common Name</strong>: The name of the person or other entity
+        that the certificate identifies.</li>
+      <li><strong>Organization</strong>: The name of the organization to which
+        the entity belongs (such as the name of a company).</li>
+      <li><strong>Organizational Unit</strong>: The name of the organizational
+        unit to which the entity belongs (such as Accounting Department).</li>
+      <li><strong>Serial Number</strong>: The certificate&apos;s serial
+        number.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Issued By</strong>: Summarizes information (similar to that
+    provided under <q>Issued To</q>; see above) about the certificate authority
+    (CA) that issued the  certificate.</li>
+  <li><strong>Validity</strong>: Indicates the period during which the
+    certificate is valid.</li>
+  <li><strong>Fingerprints</strong>: Lists the certificate&apos;s fingerprints.
+    A fingerprint is a unique number produced by applying a mathematical
+    function to the certificate contents. A certificate&apos;s fingerprint can
+    be used to verify  that the certificate has not been tampered with.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="details_tab">Details Tab</h3>
+
+<p>Click the Details tab at the top of the Certificate Viewer to see more
+  detailed information about the selected certificate. To examine information
+  for any certificate in the Certificate Hierarchy area, select its name,
+  select the field under Certificate Fields that you want to examine, and
+  read the field&apos;s value under Field Value:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Certificate Hierarchy</strong>: Displays the certificate chain,
+    with the certificate you originally selected at the bottom. A certificate
+    chain is a hierarchical series of certificates signed by successive
+    certificate authorities (CAs). A CA certificate identifies a
+    <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authority</a>
+    and is used to sign certificates issued by that authority. A CA certificate
+    can in turn be signed by the CA certificate of a parent CA and so on up to
+    a <a href="glossary.xhtml#root_ca">root CA</a>.</li>
+  <li><strong>Certificate Fields</strong>: Displays the fields of the
+    certificate selected under Certificate Hierarchy.</li>
+  <li><strong>Field Value</strong>: Displays the value of the field selected
+    under Certificate Fields.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>The Certificate Viewer displays basic ANSI types in human-readable form
+  wherever possible. For fields whose contents the Certificate Manager cannot
+  interpret, it displays the actual values contained in the certificate.</p>
+
+<h2 id="choose_security_device">Choose Security Device</h2>
+
+<p>A security device (sometimes called a token) is a hardware or software
+  device that provides cryptographic services such as encryption and decryption
+  and stores certificates and keys. The Choose Security Device window appears
+  when Certificate Manager needs help deciding which security device to use
+  when importing a certificate or performing a cryptographic operation, such as
+  generating keys for a new certificate. This window allows you to select one
+  of two or more security devices that Certificate Manager has detected on your
+  machine.</p>
+
+<p>A smart card is one example of a security device. For example, if a smart
+  card reader connected to your computer has a smart card inserted in it, the
+  name of the smart card will show up in the drop-down menu. In this case, you
+  must choose the name of the smart card from the menu to let Certificate
+  Manager know that you want to use it.</p>
+
+<p>The Certificate Manager also supplies its own default, built-in security
+  device, which can always be used no matter what additional devices are or
+  aren&apos;t available.</p>
+
+<h2 id="encryption_key_copy">Encryption Key Copy</h2>
+
+<p><a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">Certificate authorities (CAs)</a>
+  that issue separate signing and encryption email certificates typically make
+  backup copies of your private
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#encryption_key">encryption key</a> during the
+  certificate enrollment process.</p>
+
+<p>The Encryption Key Copy dialog box allows you to approve the creation of
+  such a backup or cancel the certificate request. A CA that has archived a
+  backup copy of your encryption key has the potential capability of
+  decrypting any messages you receive that were encrypted with your
+  corresponding public key.</p>
+
+<p>You can take these actions from the Encryption Key Copy dialog box:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View Certificate</strong>: To view the certificate identifying
+    the CA that is requesting the backup copy, click View Certificate.</li>
+  <li><strong>OK</strong>: If you trust the CA identified by the CA certificate
+    to decrypt encrypted messages that you receive, click OK.
+
+    <p>If you are not sure whether to trust the CA that is requesting the
+      backup copy, talk to your system administrator.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Cancel</strong>: If you don&apos;t trust the CA that is
+    requesting the backup copy, don&apos;t request a certificate from it. Click
+    Cancel to stop both the backup procedure and the request for a
+    certificate.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>After your CA makes a backup copy of the encryption key, you will be able to
+  use that key to access your encrypted mail even if you lose your password or
+  lose your own copy of the key. If no backup copy of your encryption key
+  exists and you lose your password or the key, you will have no way of reading
+  email messages that were encrypted with that key.</p>
+
+<h2 id="certificate_backup">Certificate Backup</h2>
+
+<p>When you receive a certificate, make a backup copy of the certificate and
+  its private key, then store the copy in a safe place. For example, you can
+  put the copy on a floppy disk and store it with other valuable items under
+  lock and key. That way, even if you have hard disk or file corruption
+  problems, you can easily restore the certificate.</p>
+
+<p>It can be inconvenient, at best, and in some situations catastrophic to lose
+  your certificate and its associated private key, depending on what you use it
+  for. For example:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>If you lose a certificate that identifies you to important websites, you
+    will not be able to access those websites until you obtain a new
+    certificate. </li>
+  <li>If you lose a certificate used to encrypt email messages, you will not
+    be able to read any of your encrypted email&mdash;including both encrypted
+    messages that you have sent and encrypted messages that you have received.
+    In this case, if you cannot obtain a backup of the private encryption key
+    associated with the certificate, you will never be able to read any of the
+    messages encrypted with that key.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Like any other valuable data, certificates should be backed up to avoid
+  future trouble and expense. Do it now so you don&apos;t forget.</p>
+
+<h2 id="user_identification_request">User Identification Request</h2>
+
+<p>Some websites require that you identify yourself with a certificate rather
+  than a name and password, because certificates provide a more reliable form
+  of identification. This method of identifying yourself over the Internet is
+  sometimes called
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#client_authentication">client authentication</a>.</p>
+
+<p>However, Certificate Manager may have more than one certificate on file that
+  can be used for the purposes of identifying yourself to a website. In this
+  case, Certificate Manager presents the User Identification Request dialog
+  box, which displays two kinds of information:</p>
+
+<p><strong>This site has requested that you identify yourself with a
+  certificate</strong>: This section of the dialog box lists the following
+  information:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Host name</strong>: The name of the server requesting
+    identification, used as part of its URL. For example, the host name for the
+    Netscape website is <tt>home.netscape.com</tt>.</li>
+  <li><strong>Organization</strong>: The name of the organization that runs the
+    website.</li>
+  <li><strong>Issued under</strong>: The name of the
+    <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authority (CA)</a>
+    that issued the certificate.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Choose a certificate to present as identification</strong>: The
+  certificates you have available for the purposes of identifying yourself to a
+  website are listed in the drop-down list in this section of the dialog box.
+  Choose the certificate that seems most likely to be recognized by the website
+  you want to visit.</p>
+
+<p>To help you decide, the following details of the selected certificate are
+  displayed:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Issued to</strong>: Lists information about the person identified
+    by the certificate (for example, your name and email address) and the
+    certificate&apos;s serial number and validity dates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Issued by</strong>: Summarizes information about the CA that
+    issued the certificate, such as its name, location, and state.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h2 id="new_certificate_authority">New Certificate Authority</h2>
+
+<p>The certificates that the Certificate Manager has on file, whether stored on
+  your computer or on an external security device such as a smart card, include
+  certificates that identify
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authorities (CAs)</a>.
+  To be able to recognize any other certificates it has on file, Certificate
+  Manager must have certificates for the CAs that issued or authorized issuance
+  of those certificates.</p>
+
+<p>When you decide to trust a CA, Certificate Manager downloads that CA&apos;s
+  certificate and can then recognize the kinds of certificates you trust that
+  CA to issue.</p>
+
+<p>Before downloading a new CA certificate, Certificate Manager allows you to
+  specify the purposes for which you trust the certificate, if at all. You can
+  select any of the following options:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Trust this CA to identify websites</strong>: Website certificates
+    for some websites, such as those that handle financial transactions, can be
+    extremely important, and inappropriate or false identification can have
+    negative consequences.</li>
+  <li><strong>Trust this CA to identify email users</strong>: If you intend to
+    send email users confidential information in encrypted form, or if accurate
+    identification of email users is important to you for any other reason, you
+    should consider carefully the CA&apos;s procedures for identifying
+    prospective certificate owners and whether they are appropriate for your
+    purposes before selecting this option.</li>
+  <li><strong>Trust this CA to identify software developers</strong>: Selecting
+    this option means that you trust the CA to issue certificates that identify
+    the origin of Java applets and JavaScript scripts requesting special access
+    to your computer, such as the ability to change files. Since such access
+    privileges can be misused, for example to destroy data stored on your hard
+    disk, be very careful about selecting this option unless you are certain
+    that you trust the CA for this purpose.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Before you decide to trust a new CA, make sure that you know who is
+  operating it. Make sure the CA&apos;s policies and procedures are
+  appropriate for the kinds of certificates it issues. For example, if the CA
+  issues certificates identifying websites you use for financial transactions,
+  make sure you are comfortable with the level of assurance the CA
+  provides.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View</strong>: Click this button to view the CA certificate you
+    are about to download. If you decide you don&apos;t want to download this
+    certificate, click Cancel.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h2 id="web_site_certificates">Website Certificates</h2>
+
+<p>When you attempt to go to a website that supports the use of
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#ssl">SSL</a> for
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#authentication">authentication</a> and
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#encryption">encryption</a>, you may be faced with an
+  error page. There are two types, one called
+  <a href="#secure_connection_failed_page">Secure Connection Failed</a> and one
+  called <a href="#untrusted_connection_page">Untrusted Connection</a>.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#secure_connection_failed_page">Secure Connection Failed
+      Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#untrusted_connection_page">Untrusted Connection Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#secure_connection_failed_dialog">Secure Connection Failed
+      Dialog</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#certificate_expired">Server Certificate Expired</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#certificate_not_yet_valid">Server Certificate Not Yet
+      Valid</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#domain_name_mismatch">Domain Name Mismatch</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="secure_connection_failed_page">Secure Connection Failed Page</h3>
+
+<p>In the case where you have disabled the SSL protocol (e.g. through
+  <a href="ssl_help.xhtml#ssl_settings">SSL Settings</a>) or the website that
+  you are accessing is using an older, insecure version of the SSL protocol then
+  you will be presented with a page titled &quot;Secure Connection Failed&quot;.
+  That page contains some basic background information (including the
+  <strong>Error code</strong> that uniquely identifies the type of problem
+  &brandShortName; detected with the website) and a <strong>Try Again</strong>
+  button that triggers a page reload.</p>
+
+<h3 id="untrusted_connection_page">Untrusted Connection Page</h3>
+
+<p>If SSL itself is enabled then the error page that you will be presented with
+  will be titled &quot;This Connection is Untrusted&quot;. There are many
+  different reasons why a connection can appear untrusted. Here are some of the
+  most common ones:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>the certificate of the website is <a href="#certificate_expired">no longer
+    valid (expired)</a></li>
+  <li>the certificate of the website is
+    <a href="#certificate_not_yet_valid">not yet valid</a></li>
+  <li>the certificate of the website is only valid for another website
+    (<a href="#domain_name_mismatch">domain name mismatch</a>)</li>
+  <li>the certificate of the website is self-signed (thus the identity of the
+    website cannot be verified).</li>
+  <li>the issuer certificate is not trusted (&brandShortName; cannot
+    verify the identity of the website because it doesn&apos;t
+    recognize the <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate
+    authority (CA)</a> that issued the website&apos;s certificate)</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>The page displayed in the above cases is meant to help you understand why
+  &brandShortName; was unable to establish a secure connection to the website.
+  It starts by telling you that the website&apos;s identity could not be
+  verified, then offers you to leave the page by clicking the <strong>This
+  sounds bad, take me to my home page instead</strong> button. If you are unsure
+  what to do it is recommended that you follow this advice.</p>
+
+<p>If you want to know a little bit more about the actual problem at hand you
+  may expand the corresponding section by clicking the chevron in front of
+  <strong>Technical Details</strong>. That section also contains the
+  <strong>Error code</strong> that uniquely identifies the type of problem
+  &brandShortName; detected with the website.</p>
+
+<h4 id="add_security_exception">Adding a Security Exception</h4>
+
+<p>The <strong>I Understand the Risks</strong> section of the Untrusted
+  Connection page allows you to tell &brandShortName; to explicitly override the
+  security checks for this website by adding an exception. If you expand the
+  section by clicking the chevron in front of it you will see an <strong>Add
+  Exception</strong> button that will take you to a dialog allowing you to get
+  and view the website&apos;s certificate and optionally add a Security
+  Exception for it (either permanently or just for the current session). Those
+  exceptions can be administered through the Certificate Manager&apos;s
+  <a href="certs_help.xhtml#servers">Servers</a> tab.</p>
+
+<h3 id="secure_connection_failed_dialog">Secure Connection Failed Dialog</h3>
+
+<p>In cases where &brandShortName; cannot determine the actual cause of the
+  problem a dialog titled &quot;Secure Connection Failed&quot; is shown in
+  addition to the <a href="#untrusted_connection_page">Untrusted Connection
+  page</a>. That dialog includes a <strong>View Certificate</strong> button
+  that allows you to examine the website&apos;s certificate more closely.</p>
+
+<h3 id="certificate_expired">Certificate Expired</h3>
+
+<p>Like a credit card, a driver&apos;s license, and many other forms of
+  identification, a <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate">certificate</a> is
+  valid for a specified period of time. When a certificate expires, the owner
+  of the certificate needs to get a new one.</p>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; <a href="#untrusted_connection_page">warns</a> you when you
+  attempt to visit a website whose server certificate has expired. The first
+  thing you should do is make sure the time and date displayed by your computer
+  is correct. If your computer&apos;s clock is set to a date that is after the
+  expiration date, &brandShortName; treats the website&apos;s certificate as
+  expired.</p>
+
+<p>If your computer&apos;s clock is set correctly, you need to make a decision
+  about whether to trust the website. This decision depends on what you intend
+  to do at the website and what else you know about it. Most commercial sites
+  will make sure that they replace their certificates before they expire. If you
+  choose to continue you need to <a href="#add_security_exception">add a
+  security exception</a>.</p>
+
+<h3 id="certificate_not_yet_valid">Certificate Not Yet Valid</h3>
+
+<p>Like a credit card, a driver&apos;s license, and many other forms of
+  identification, a <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate">certificate</a> is
+  valid for a specified period of time.</p>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; <a href="#untrusted_connection_page">warns</a> you when you
+  attempt to visit a website whose server certificate&apos;s validity period has
+  not yet started. The first thing you should do is make sure the time and date
+  displayed by your own computer is correct. If your computer&apos;s clock is
+  set to the wrong date, &brandShortName; may treat the server certificate as
+  not yet valid even if this is not the case.</p>
+
+<p>If your computer&apos;s clock is set correctly, you need to make a decision
+  about whether to trust the website. This decision depends on what you intend
+  to do at the website and what else you know about it. Most commercial sites
+  will make sure that the validity period for their certificates has begun
+  before beginning to use them. If you choose to continue you need to
+  <a href="#add_security_exception">add a security exception</a>.</p>
+
+<h3 id="domain_name_mismatch">Domain Name Mismatch</h3>
+
+<p>A server <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate">certificate</a> specifies the
+  name of the server in the form of the website&apos;s domain name. For example,
+  the domain name for the Mozilla website is <tt>www.mozilla.org</tt>. If the
+  domain name in a server&apos;s certificate doesn&apos;t match the actual
+  domain name of the website, it may be a sign that someone is attempting to
+  intercept your communication with the website.</p>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; <a href="#untrusted_connection_page">warns</a> you when you
+  attempt to visit a website whose server certificate&apos;s domain does not
+  match the domain of the website you are trying to visit. The decision whether
+  to trust the website anyway depends on what you intend to do at the site and
+  what else you know about it. Most commercial sites will make sure that the
+  host name for a website certificate matches the website&apos;s actual host
+  name. If you choose to continue you need to
+  <a href="#add_security_exception">add a security exception</a>.</p>
+
+<p>If you decide to accept the certificate anyway (either for this session or
+  permanently), you should be cautious about what you do on the website, and you
+  should treat any information you find there as potentially suspect.</p>
+
+</body>
+</html>
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_help.xhtml
@@ -0,0 +1,419 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>Certificate Manager</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<div class="boilerPlate">This document is provided for your information only.
+  It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security of
+  your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however,
+  address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a
+  recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and security
+  protection on the Internet.</div>
+
+<h1 id="certificate_manager">Certificate Manager</h1>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Certificate Manager. For more
+  information on using certificates, see <a href="using_certs_help.xhtml">Using
+  Certificates</a>.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not currently viewing the Certificate Manager window, follow
+  these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Privacy &amp; Security category, click Certificates. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy &amp; Security to expand
+    the list.)</li>
+  <li>Click Manage Certificates.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#your_certificates">Your Certificates</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#people">People</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#servers">Servers</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#authorities">Authorities</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#others">Others</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="your_certificates">Your Certificates</h2>
+
+<p>The Your Certificates tab in the <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate
+  Manager</a> displays the certificates on file that identify you. Your
+  certificates are listed under the names of the organizations that issued
+  them. If you can&apos;t see certificate names under an organization&apos;s
+  name, double-click the name to expand it.</p>
+
+<p>Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates (most actions
+  require one or more certificates to be selected):</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
+    certificates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Backup</strong>: Initiate the process of saving the selected
+    certificates. A window appears that allows you to choose a password to
+    protect the backup. You can then save the backup in a directory of your
+    choice.</li>
+  <li><strong>Backup All</strong>: Initiate the process of saving all the
+    certificates stored in the
+    <a href="glossary.xhtml#software_security_device">Software Security
+    Device</a>.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Certificates on smart cards cannot be backed up.
+      Whether you select some of your certificates and click Backup, or click
+      Backup All, the resulting backup file will not include any certificates
+      stored on smart cards or other external security devices. You can only
+      back up certificates that are stored on the built-in Software Security
+      Device.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Import</strong>: Import a file containing one or more
+    certificates that were previously backed up. When you click Import,
+    Certificate Manager first asks you to locate the file that contains the
+    backup. The names of certificate backup files typically end in
+    <tt>.p12</tt>; for example, <tt>MyCert.p12</tt>. After you select the file
+    to be imported, Certificate Manager asks you to enter the password that you
+    set when you backed up the certificate.</li>
+  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="choose_a_certificate_backup_password">Choose a Certificate Backup
+  Password</h3>
+
+<p>A certificate backup password protects one or more certificates that you are
+  backing up from the <a href="#your_certificates">Your Certificates</a> tab in
+  the Certificate Manager.</p>
+
+<p>The Certificate Manager asks you to set this password when you back up
+  certificates, and requests it when you attempt to import certificates that
+  have previously been backed up.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Certificate backup password</strong>: Type your backup password
+    into this field.</li>
+  <li><strong>Certificate backup password (again)</strong>: Type your backup
+    password again. If you don&apos;t type it the second time exactly as you
+    did the first time, the OK button remains inactive. If this happens, try
+    typing the new password again.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>If someone obtains the file containing a certificate that you have backed up
+  and successfully imports the certificate, that person can send messages or
+  access websites while pretending to be you. This can be a problem, for
+  example, if you digitally sign important email messages or manage your bank
+  or investment accounts over the Internet.</p>
+
+<p>Therefore, it&apos;s important to select a certificate backup password that
+  is difficult to guess. The <strong>password quality meter</strong> gives you
+  a rough idea of the quality of your password as you type it based on factors
+  such as length and the use of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, numbers,
+  and symbols. It does not guarantee that your password cannot be guessed,
+  however.</p>
+
+<p>For further guidelines, see
+  <a href="passwords_help.xhtml#choosing_a_good_password">Choosing a Good
+  Password</a>.</p>
+
+<p>It&apos;s also important to record the password in a safe place&mdash;and
+  not anywhere that&apos;s easily accessible to someone else. If you forget
+  this password, you can&apos;t import the backup of your certificate.</p>
+
+<h3 id="delete_your_certificates">Delete Your Certificates</h3>
+
+<p>Before deleting one of your own expired certificates from the
+  <a href="#your_certificates">Your Certificates</a> tab in the Certificate
+  Manager, make sure you won&apos;t need it again some day for reading old
+  email messages that you may have encrypted with the corresponding private
+  key.</p>
+
+<h2 id="people">People</h2>
+
+<p>The People tab in the <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate Manager</a>
+  displays email certificates you have on file that identify other people.</p>
+
+<p>When people send you digitally signed email messages, Certificate Manager
+  imports their certificates automatically. You can use these certificates to
+  send encrypted messages to those people.</p>
+
+<p>Certificates that identify people are listed under the names of the
+  organizations that issued them. If you can&apos;t see certificate names under
+  an organization&apos;s name, double-click the name to expand it.</p>
+
+<p>Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates (most actions
+  require one or more certificates to be selected):</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
+    certificates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Edit</strong>: View or change the trust settings that Certificate
+    Manager associates with the selected certificates. You can use these
+    settings to designate an email certificate as one that you trust or
+    don&apos;t trust for identification purposes.</li>
+  <li><strong>Import</strong>: Import a file containing one or more
+    certificates. When you click Import, Certificate Manager first asks you
+    to locate the file that contains the certificate(s).</li>
+  <li><strong>Export</strong>: Export the selected certificates. You can
+    choose among various formats.</li>
+  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="delete_email_certificates">Delete Email Certificates</h3>
+
+<p>Before deleting someone else&apos;s certificate from the
+  <a href="#people">People</a> tab in the Certificate Manager, make sure you
+  won&apos;t need it again some day to send encrypted email to that person or
+  to verify digital signatures on messages from that person.</p>
+
+<h2 id="servers">Servers</h2>
+
+<p>The Servers tab in the Certificate Manager displays certificates you have
+  on file that identify servers (websites, mail servers).</p>
+
+<p>Certificates that identify servers are grouped under the names of the
+  organizations that issued them. If you can&apos;t see certificate names under
+  an organization&apos;s name, double-click the name to expand it.</p>
+
+<p>Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates (most actions
+  require one or more certificates to be selected):</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
+    certificates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Edit</strong>: View or change the trust settings that Certificate
+    Manager associates with the selected certificates. You can use these
+    settings to designate a website certificate as one that you trust or
+    don&apos;t trust for identification purposes.</li>
+  <li><strong>Import</strong>: Import a file containing one or more
+    certificates. When you click Import, Certificate Manager first asks you
+    to locate the file that contains the certificate(s).</li>
+  <li><strong>Export</strong>: Export the selected certificates. You can
+    choose among various formats.</li>
+  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Add Exception</strong>: Add a security exception for a server
+    (website, mail server) that identifies itself with invalid information.
+    This is an advanced feature, act with caution.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="edit_web_site_certificate_trust_settings">Edit Web Site Certificate
+  Trust Settings</h3>
+
+<p>When you select a website certificate from the
+  <a href="#servers">Servers</a> tab in the Certificate Manager and click Edit,
+  you see a window entitled <q>Edit web site certificate trust settings</q>.
+  Here you specify whether you want to trust the selected certificate for
+  identifying the website and setting up an encrypted connection.</p>
+
+<p>The dialog box contains these elements:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>The certificate <q><em>name of certificate</em></q> was
+    issued by</strong>: Provides information about the
+    <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authority</a>
+    that issued this certificate.</li>
+  <li><strong>Edit certificate trust settings</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Trust the authenticity of this certificate</strong>: If you
+        select this option, Certificate Manager will henceforth trust this
+        certificate for the purposes of identifying this website or setting up
+        an encrypted connection. If you select this option and then attempt to
+        visit the website, your browser will access the site with few, if any,
+        warnings.</li>
+      <li><strong>Do not trust the authenticity of this certificate</strong>:
+        If you select this option, Certificate Manager will no longer trust
+        this certificate for the purposes of identifying this website or
+        setting up an encrypted connection. If you select this option and
+        then attempt to visit the website, you will see one or more warning
+        messages before you can access the site.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Edit CA Trust</strong>: Click this button to specify trust
+    settings for the certificate authority (CA) that issued the website
+    certificate. These settings allow you to trust or not to trust different
+    kinds of certificates issued by that certificate authority. For example,
+    you can choose to trust all website certificates issued by the
+    authority.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Click OK to confirm your choice.</p>
+
+<h3 id="delete_web_site_certificates">Delete Website Certificates</h3>
+
+<p>Before deleting a server certificate from the
+  <a href="#servers">Servers</a> tab in the Certificate Manager, make sure that
+  you won&apos;t need it again for the purposes of identifying a website or
+  mail server and setting up an encrypted connection.</p>
+
+<h2 id="authorities">Authorities</h2>
+
+<p>The Authorities tab in the <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate
+  Manager</a> displays the certificates you have on file that identify
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authorities
+  (CAs)</a>.</p>
+
+<p>CA certificates are grouped under the names of the organizations that issued
+  them. If you can&apos;t see certificate names under an organization&apos;s
+  name, double-click the name to expand it.</p>
+
+<p>Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates (most actions
+  require one or more certificates to be selected):</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
+    certificates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Edit</strong>: View or change the settings that Certificate
+    Manager associates with the selected certificates. You can use these
+    settings to designate what kinds of certificates, if any, you trust that
+    are issued by the corresponding CAs.</li>
+  <li><strong>Import</strong>: Import a file containing one or more
+    certificates. When you click Import, Certificate Manager first asks you
+    to locate the file that contains the certificate(s).</li>
+  <li><strong>Export</strong>: Export the selected certificates. You can
+    choose among various formats.</li>
+  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To ensure that an entire
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_chain">certificate chain</a> of CAs are
+  all trusted, you need to edit the root CA certifiate only.</p>
+
+<p>To import the chain, you click a link on a web page provided by the CA. You
+  can then use the authorities tab to locate the root certificate and edit its
+  trust settings.</p>
+
+<p>The root and intermediate CAs all appear under the same organization. The
+  root certificate is the one that lists itself as the issuer.</p>
+
+<p><strong>If you download an intermediate CA</strong>: If you download an
+  intermediate CA certificate that chains to a root certificate already marked
+  as trusted in your browser, you don&apos;t have to indicate what purposes you
+  trust it for. Intermediate certificates automatically inherit the trust
+  settings of their roots.</p>
+
+<h3 id="edit_ca_certificate_trust_settings">Edit CA Certificate Trust
+  Settings</h3>
+
+<p>When you select a CA certificate from the
+  <a href="#authorities">Authorities</a> tab in the Certificate Manager and
+  click Edit, you see a window entitled <q>Edit CA certificate trust
+  settings</q>. Here you specify the kinds of certificates you trust this CA
+  to certify. If you deselect all the checkboxes, Certificate Manager will not
+  trust any certificates issued by this CA.</p>
+
+<p>The settings have these effects:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>This certificate can identify websites</strong>: Certificate
+    Manager will trust certificates issued by this CA for the purpose of
+    identifying websites and encrypting website connections. If you deselect
+    this checkbox, Certificate Manager will not trust website certificates
+    issued by this CA.</li>
+  <li><strong>This certificate can identify mail users</strong>: Certificate
+    Manager will trust certificates issued by this CA for the purpose of
+    signing or encrypting email. If you deselect this checkbox, Certificate
+    Manager will not trust email certificates issued by this CA.</li>
+  <li><strong>This certificate can identify software makers</strong>:
+    Certificate Manager will trust certificates issued by this CA for the
+    purpose of identifying software makers. If you deselect this checkbox,
+    Certificate Manager will not trust such certificates issued by this
+    CA.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Click OK to confirm the settings you have selected.</p>
+
+<h3 id="delete_ca_certificates">Delete CA Certificates</h3>
+
+<p>Before deleting a CA certificate from the
+  <a href="#authorities">Authorities</a> tab in the Certificate Manager,
+  make sure that you won&apos;t need it again to validate certificates issued
+  by that CA. If you delete the only valid certificate you have for a CA,
+  Certificate Manager will no longer trust any certificates issued by that
+  CA.</p>
+
+<h2 id="others">Others</h2>
+
+<p>The Others tab in the Certificate Manager displays certificates you have
+  on file that do not fit in any of the other categories, i.e. certificates
+  that neither belong to you, other people, servers or CAs.</p>
+
+<p>Other certificates are grouped under the names of the organizations that
+  issued them. If you can&apos;t see certificate names under an
+  organization&apos;s name, double-click the name to expand it.</p>
+
+<p>Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
+    certificates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Export</strong>: Export the selected certificates. You can
+    choose among various formats.</li>
+  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h2 id="device_manager">Device Manager</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes the options available in the Device Manager window.
+  For background information and step-by-step instructions on the use of the
+  Device Manager, see
+  <a href="using_certs_help.xhtml#managing_smart_cards_and_other_security_devices">Managing
+  Smart Cards and Other Security Devices</a>.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not currently viewing the Device Manager window, follow these
+  steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Privacy &amp; Security category, click Certificates. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy &amp; Security to expand
+    the list.)</li>
+  <li>In the Certificates panel, click Manage Security Devices.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Device Manager lists each available PKCS #11 module, and the security
+  devices managed by each module below the module&apos;s name.</p>
+
+<p>When you select a module or device, information about the selected item
+  appears in the middle of the window, and some of the buttons on the right
+  side of the window become available. In general, you perform an action on
+  a module or device by selecting its name and clicking the appropriate
+  button:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Log In</strong>: Log into the selected security device. After you
+    have logged in to the device, the frequency with which you will be asked to
+    enter the master password for the device depends on the
+    <a href="passwords_help.xhtml#master_password_timeout">Master Password
+    Timeout</a> settings.</li>
+  <li><strong>Log Out</strong>: Log out of the selected security device. After
+    you have logged out of the device, the device and the certificates it
+    contains will not be available until you log in again.</li>
+  <li><strong>Change Password</strong>: Change the master password for the
+    selected security device.</li>
+  <li><strong>Load</strong>: Displays a dialog box that allows you to specify
+    the name and location of a new PKCS #11 module. Before adding a new module,
+    you should first install the module software on your computer and if
+    necessary connect any associated hardware device. Follow the instructions
+    provided by the vendor.</li>
+  <li><strong>Unload</strong>: Unload the selected module. If you unload a
+    module, both the module and its security devices are no longer available
+    for use by the browser.</li>
+  <li><strong>Enable FIPS</strong>: Turns the FIPS mode on and off. For more
+    information, see
+    <a href="using_certs_help.xhtml#enable_fips_mode">Enable FIPS
+    Mode</a>.</li>
+</ul>
+
+</body>
+</html>
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_prefs_help.xhtml
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>Privacy &amp; Security Preferences - Certificates</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<h1 id="certificate_settings">Certificate Settings</h1>
+
+<p>This section describes how to set your certificate preferences and how to
+  use the Certificate Manager, Device Manager, and other dialog boxes related
+  to certificates.</p>
+
+<p>For step-by-step descriptions of various tasks related to certificates, see
+  <a href="using_certs_help.xhtml">Using Certificates</a>.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#privacy_and_security_preferences_certificates">Certificate 
+      Preferences</a></li>
+    <li><a href="certs_help.xhtml">Certificate Manager</a></li>
+    <li><a href="certs_help.xhtml#device_manager">Device Manager</a></li>
+    <li><a href="cert_dialog_help.xhtml">Certificate Information and
+      Decisions</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h1 id="privacy_and_security_preferences_certificates">Privacy &amp; Security
+  Preferences - Certificates</h1>
+
+<p>This section describes use the Certificates preferences panel. To view
+  Certificates preferences, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Privacy &amp; Security category, click Certificates. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy &amp; Security to expand
+    the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<h3 id="client_certificate_selection">Client Certificate Selection</h3>
+
+<p>Some websites require you to identify yourself with a certificate. The
+  option you select here determines how the browser identifies the certificate
+  to present among those you may have on file:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Select Automatically:</strong> Click this option if you want
+    the browser to select a certificate without asking you.</li>
+  <li><strong>Ask Every Time:</strong> Click this option if you want the browser
+    to ask you which certificate to use each time a website requests one.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="manage_certificates">Manage Certificates</h3>
+
+<p>Certificates are the digital equivalent of ID cards&mdash;they help other
+  people identify you, and they help you identify other people, websites, and
+  organizations.</p>
+
+<p>To examine or configure the certificates you have on file, click Manage
+  Certificates.</p>
+
+<h3 id="manage_security_devices">Manage Security Devices</h3>
+
+<p>A security device is a hardware or software device that stores your
+  certificates and keys. For example, a smart card is a security device. Your
+  browser has its own built-in software security device, and you can use
+  additional security devices, such as smart cards, at the same time.</p>
+
+<p>To examine or configure your security devices, click Manage Security
+  Devices.</p>
+
+</body>
+</html>
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/composer_help.xhtml
@@ -0,0 +1,2494 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>Creating Web Pages with &brandShortName; Composer</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<h1 id="creating_web_pages_with_mozilla_composer">Creating Web Pages with
+  &brandShortName; Composer</h1>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; Composer lets you create your own web pages and publish
+  them on the web. You don&apos;t have to know HTML to use Composer; it is as
+  easy to use as a word processor.</p>
+
+<p>Toolbar buttons let you add lists, tables, images, links to other pages,
+  colors, and font styles. You can see what your document will look like on
+  the Web as you create it, and you can easily share your document with
+  other users, no matter what type of browser or HTML-capable email program
+  they use.</p>
+
+<p>To start using &brandShortName; Composer:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click the Composer icon in the lower-left corner of any
+    &brandShortName; window.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<div><img src="images/composer_icon.png" width="128" height="23"
+  alt="" /></div>
+<div style="-moz-margin-start: 80px;"><strong>Composer icon</strong></div>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#starting_a_new_page">Starting a New Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Formatting Your Web Pages</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Adding Tables to Your Web
+      Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#adding_images_to_your_web_page">Adding Pictures (Images) to
+      Your Web Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#setting_page_properties">Setting Page Properties</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Creating Links in
+      Composer</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Publishing Your Pages on
+      the Web</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#composer_preferences">Composer Preferences</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h1 id="starting_a_new_page" style="margin-top: 50px;">Starting a New Page</h1>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#creating_a_new_page">Creating a New Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#saving_and_browsing_your_new_page">Saving and Browsing Your
+      New Page</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="creating_a_new_page">Creating a New Page</h2>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; Composer is an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) editor that
+  allows you to create and edit web pages. Composer is a <em>WYSIWYG</em> (What
+  You See Is What You Get) editor, so you can display how your page will look
+  to the reader as you&apos;re creating it. It is not necessary for you to know
+  HTML, since most of the basic HTML functions are available as commands from
+  the toolbars and menus.</p>
+
+<p>Composer also lets you edit the HTML source if you want. To view or edit the
+  HTML source code, open the View menu, and choose HTML Source, or click the
+  &lt;HTML&gt; Source tab in the Edit Mode toolbar at the bottom of the
+  Composer window.</p>
+
+<p>To create a web page, use one of the methods described below. Once
+  you&apos;ve started a page, you can add and edit text just as you would
+  in a word processor.</p>
+
+<p><strong>To create a new page from the browser</strong>:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Open the File menu, choose New, and then Composer Page. A Composer
+    window containing a blank page opens.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>To edit a page you&apos;re currently viewing in the
+  browser</strong>:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>In the browser window of the page you&apos;re viewing, open the File
+    menu and choose Edit Page. You see a Composer window that contains the
+    page you&apos;re viewing.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>To create a new page in Composer</strong>:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click the New button in Composer&apos;s toolbar.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>To start from an HTML file stored on your local drive</strong>:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Window menu and choose Composer. You see the Composer
+    window.</li>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Open File. You see the Open HTML File
+    dialog box.</li>
+  <li>On your local drive, locate the file that you want to edit.</li>
+  <li>Click Open to display the specified file in a Composer window.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>To edit a web page</strong>:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Window menu and choose Browser.</li>
+  <li>Go to a web page: type the URL of the page (for example,
+    <tt>http://www.mozilla.org</tt>) in the Location Bar and press
+    <kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd>.</li>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Edit Page.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: In the Composer window you can quickly open the most
+  recent file you&apos;ve been working on by opening the File menu, choosing
+  Recent Pages, and then selecting the file you want from the list.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#starting_a_new_page">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="saving_and_browsing_your_new_page">Saving and Browsing Your New
+  Page</h2>
+
+<p>You can save Composer documents in HTML or text-only format. Saving a
+  document in HTML format preserves the document&apos;s formatting, such
+  as text styles (for example, bold or italic), tables, links, and images.
+  Saving a document in text-only format removes all the HTML tags but
+  preserves the document&apos;s text.</p>
+
+<p>To save a document as an HTML file:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Save or click the Save button on the
+    Composition toolbar.
+
+    <p>If you haven&apos;t already given your page a title, Composer prompts
+      you to do so. Composer displays the page title in the browser
+      window&apos;s title bar when you view the page in the browser. The
+      document&apos;s page title also appears in your list of bookmarks
+      if you bookmark the page.</p>
+
+    <p>Composer then prompts you to enter a filename and specify the location
+      where you want to save the file. Make sure you preserve the .html
+      extension in the filename.</p>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To change the filename or location of an existing HTML file:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Choose Save As and select a different filename or location.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>When you save a page in Composer, all parts of the page (the HTML, images
+  and other files, such as sound files and style sheets), are saved locally
+  on your hard drive. If you only want to save the HTML part of the page, you
+  must change the Composer preference for saving pages. See
+  <a href="#composer">Composer Preferences - Composer</a> for more information
+  on changing Composer&apos;s setting for saving pages.</p>
+
+<p>If an image location is absolute (starts with <q>http://</q>) and you are
+  connected to the Internet, you will still see that image in the document in
+  Composer and the browser. However, if the image location is relative to the
+  page location (starts with <q>file:///</q>), then you won&apos;t see the
+  image in the local version of the document.</p>
+
+<p>To save a document as a text-only file:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Export to Text.</li>
+  <li>Enter the filename and specify the location where you want to save the
+    file.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Images do not appear in documents saved in the
+  text-only format.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can choose Revert to Last Saved from the File
+  menu to retrieve the most recently saved copy of the document in which
+  you&apos;re working. Keep in mind that your current changes will be lost.</p>
+
+<p>To view your page in a browser window in order to test your links:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Browse Page (or click Browse in the
+    Composition toolbar). If you have not yet saved your document, Composer
+    prompts you to enter a page title, filename, and location. The Composer
+    window remains open behind the new browser window.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#starting_a_new_page">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h1 id="formatting_your_web_pages">Formatting Your Web Pages</h1>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#formatting_paragraphs_headings_and_lists">Formatting
+      Paragraphs, Headings, and Lists</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#working_with_lists">Working with Lists</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#changing_text_color_style_and_font">Changing Text Color,
+      Style, and Font</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#removing_or_discontinuing_text_styles">Removing or
+      Discontinuing Text Styles</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#finding_and_replacing_text">Finding and Replacing
+      Text</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#inserting_horizontal_lines">Inserting Horizontal
+      Lines</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#inserting_special_characters">Inserting Special
+      Characters</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#inserting_html_elements_and_attributes">Inserting HTML
+      Elements and Attributes</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#validating_the_html">Validating the HTML</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#choosing_the_right_editing_mode">Choosing the Right Editing
+      Mode</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="formatting_paragraphs_headings_and_lists">Formatting Paragraphs,
+  Headings, and Lists</h2>
+
+<p>To apply a format to a paragraph, begin from the Composer window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the format to begin,
+    or select the text you want to format.</li>
+  <li>Choose a paragraph format using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Body Text</strong>: Applies the application default font and
+        style for regular text, without affecting the spacing before or after
+        the text.</li>
+      <li><strong>Paragraph</strong>: Inserts a paragraph tag (use this to
+        begin a new paragraph). The paragraph includes top and bottom
+        margins.</li>
+      <li><strong>Heading 1</strong> - <strong>Heading 6</strong>: Formats the
+        paragraph as a heading. Heading 1 is the highest-level heading, while
+        Heading 6 is the lowest-level heading.</li>
+      <li><strong>Address</strong>: Can be used for a web page <q>signature</q>
+        that indicates the author of the page and the person to contact for
+        more information, for example: <tt>user@example.com</tt> 
+
+        <p>You might want to include the date and a copyright notice. This
+          format usually appears at the bottom of the web page under a
+          horizontal line. The browser displays the address format in
+          italics.</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Preformat</strong>: This is useful for elements such as code
+        examples, column data, and mail messages that you want displayed in a
+        fixed-width font. In normal text, most browsers remove extra spaces,
+        tabs, and paragraph returns. However, text that uses the Preformatted
+        style is displayed with the white space intact, preserving the layout
+        of the original text.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To format text as a heading:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point anywhere within the text that you
+    want to format.</li>
+  <li>Using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar, choose the level of
+    heading you want, from 1 (largest) to 6 (smallest). Choose <q>Heading 1</q>
+    for your main heading, <q>Heading 2</q> for the next level, and so
+    forth.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To apply a list item format:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the line of text that you want
+    to format.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose List.</li>
+  <li>Choose the list style:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Bulleted</strong>: Each item has a bullet (dot) next to it
+        (as in this list).</li>
+      <li><strong>Numbered</strong>: Items are numbered.</li>
+      <li><strong>Term</strong> and <strong>Definition</strong>: These two
+        styles work together, creating a glossary-style appearance. Use the
+        Term tag for the word being defined, and the Definition tag for the
+        definition. The Term text appears flush left, and the Definition
+        text appears indented.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can quickly apply a list style to a block of
+  text by selecting the text and clicking the Numbered List
+  <img src="images/numbers.gif" width="21" height="21" alt="" />
+  or Bulleted List
+  <img src="images/bullets.gif" width="20" height="20" alt="" />
+  buttons on the Format toolbar.</p>
+
+<p>To change the style of bullets or numbers:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the text of the list item you
+    want to change, or select one or more items in the list if you want to
+    apply a new style to the entire list.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose List Properties.</li>
+  <li>Select a bullet or number style from the drop-down list. For numbered
+    lists, you can specify a starting number. For bulleted lists, you can
+    change the bullet style.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can also double-click on a bullet or number in a
+  list to display the List Properties dialog box.</p>
+
+<p>To align a paragraph or text in your page, for example, centering or
+  aligning to the left or right:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the paragraph or line of text
+    you want to align.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Align; then choose an alignment
+    option.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: You can also use the Format toolbar to align
+  text.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="working_with_lists">Working with Lists</h2>
+
+<p>To end a list and continue typing body text:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point at the end of the last list item and
+    press <kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> twice to
+    end the list.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To change one or more list items to body text:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the list item, or select the
+    list items.</li>
+  <li>In a numbered list, click the numbered list button (or in a bulleted
+    list, click the bulleted list button) in the Format toolbar.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To position indented text below a list item:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the list item.</li>
+  <li>Press <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd
+    class="noMac">Enter</kbd>to create the hanging indent.</li>
+  <li>Type the text you want to indent.</li>
+  <li>Press <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd
+    class="noMac">Enter</kbd> to create another indented paragraph, or press
+    <kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> to create the
+    next list item.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can increase or decrease the indentation of list
+  items by clicking anywhere in a list item and then clicking the Indent or
+  Outdent button on the Format toolbar. Alternatively, click anywhere in a
+  list item and press <kbd>Tab</kbd> to indent one level. Press
+  <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd>Tab</kbd> to outdent one level.</p>
+
+<p>To merge two adjacent lists:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the two lists that you want to merge. Be sure to select all of
+    the elements in both lists. Note that any text in between the two lists
+    will also become part of the merged list.</li>
+  <li>Click the bulleted or numbered list button in the Format toolbar to
+    merge the lists.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="changing_text_color_style_and_font">Changing Text Color, Style, and
+  Font</h2>
+
+<p>To change the style, color, or font of selected text:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the text you want to format.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose one of the following:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Font</strong>: Use this to choose a font. If you prefer to
+        use fonts specified by the reader&apos;s browser, select Variable
+        Width or Fixed Width.
+
+        <p><strong>Note</strong>: The fonts Helvetica, Arial, Times, and
+          Courier generally look the same when viewed on different computers.
+          If you select a different font, it may not look the same when viewed
+          using a different computer.</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Size</strong>: Use this to choose a <em>relative</em> font
+        size or select an option to increase or decrease text size (relative
+        to the surrounding text).</li>
+      <li><strong>Text Style</strong>: Use this to select a style, such as
+        italic, bold, or underline, or to apply a structured style, for
+        example, Code.</li>
+      <li><strong>Text Color</strong>: Use this to choose a color from the
+        color picker. If you are familiar with HTML hexadecimal color codes,
+        you can type a specific code or you can just type a color name (for
+        example, <q>blue</q>). You&apos;ll find the official W3C list of CSS
+        supported color names
+        <a href="http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#color-units">here</a>,
+        and another list of commonly supported color names 
+        <a href="http://www.w3schools.com/html/html_colornames.asp">here</a>.
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To change the background color of the page:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click anywhere in the page.</li>
+  <li>Click the background color block in the Format toolbar.</li>
+  <li>Choose a background color from the Block Background Color dialog
+    box.</li>
+  <li>Click OK.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To quickly change the color of text to the color
+  last used, select the text, then press Shift and click on the text color
+  block in the Format toolbar. This is useful when you want to use one
+  color for separate lines of text.</p>
+
+<p>You can also use an image as a background. See
+  <a href="#setting_page_colors_and_backgrounds">Setting Page Colors and
+  Backgrounds</a>.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="removing_or_discontinuing_text_styles">Removing or Discontinuing Text
+  Styles</h2>
+
+<p>To remove all text styles (bold, italic, and so on) from selected text:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the text.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Remove All Text Styles.</li>
+  <li>Continue typing.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To continue typing text with all text styles removed:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Place the insertion point where you want to discontinue the text
+    styles.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Text Styles.</li>
+  <li>Continue typing.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="finding_and_replacing_text">Finding and Replacing Text</h2>
+
+<p>To find text in the page you&apos;re currently working on:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want to begin your
+    search.</li>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the Find and
+    Replace dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Type the text you want to locate in the <q>Find what</q> field. To narrow
+    the search, check one or more of the following options:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Match exact case</strong>: Use this to specify whether
+        the search is for case-sensitive text.</li>
+      <li><strong>Wrap around</strong>: Use this to search to the end of the
+        page and then start again from the top or bottom, depending on whether
+        you are searching forward or backwards.</li>
+      <li><strong>Search backwards</strong>: Use this to search back from the
+        insertion point to the beginning of the page.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Find Next to begin searching. When Composer locates the first
+    occurrence of the text, click Find Next to search for the next
+    occurrence.</li>
+  <li>Click Close when you are done.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To find and replace text in the page you&apos;re currently working on:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want to begin your
+    search.</li>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the Find and
+    Replace dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Type the text you want to find and then type the replacement text.</li>
+  <li>To narrow the search, check one or more of the following options:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Match exact case</strong>: Use this to specify whether
+        the search is for case-sensitive text. If you don&apos;t select this
+        option, the search will find matching text in both upper and lower
+        case.</li>
+      <li><strong>Wrap around</strong>: Use this to search to the end of the
+        page and then start again from the top.</li>
+      <li><strong>Search backwards</strong>: Use this to search from the end
+        to the beginning of the page.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Find Next to search for the next occurrence. Composer selects the
+    next occurrence of the text.</li>
+  <li>Click Replace to replace the selected text with the replacement text.
+    Click Replace and Find to replace the selected text and find the next
+    occurrence. Click Replace All to replace every occurrence in the document
+    with the replacement text.</li>
+  <li>Click Close when you are done.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="inserting_horizontal_lines">Inserting Horizontal Lines</h2>
+
+<p>Horizontal lines are typically used to separate different sections of a
+  document visually. To insert a horizontal line (also called a <em>rule</em>)
+  in your page, begin from the Composer window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the line to
+    appear.</li>
+  <li>Open the Insert menu and choose Horizontal Line.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<h3 id="setting_horizontal_line_properties">Setting Horizontal Line
+  Properties</h3>
+
+<p>You can customize a line&apos;s height, length, width, alignment, and
+  shading.</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Double-click the line to display the Horizontal Line Properties dialog
+    box.</li>
+  <li>Edit any of these properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Width</strong>: Enter the width and then choose <q>% of
+        window</q> or <q>pixels</q>. If you specify width as a percentage,
+        the line&apos;s width changes whenever the Composer window&apos;s
+        or browser window&apos;s width changes.</li>
+      <li><strong>Height</strong>: Type a number for the line&apos;s height
+        (in pixels).</li>
+      <li><strong>3-D Shading</strong>: Select this to add depth to the line
+        by adding a bevel shading.</li>
+      <li><strong>Alignment</strong>: Specify where you want to place the
+        line (left, center, or right).</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Use as Default to use these settings as the default the next time
+    you insert a horizontal line.</li>
+  <li>To edit the properties of a horizontal line manually, click Advanced
+    Edit. See the section,
+    <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>,
+    for details.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can select <q>HTML Tags</q> from the View menu to
+  show all the HTML elements in yellow boxes. Click any yellow box to select
+  everything within that HTML tag or element. Double-click any yellow box to
+  display the
+  <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>
+  dialog box for that HTML tag or element.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="inserting_special_characters">Inserting Special Characters</h2>
+
+<p>To insert special characters such as accent marks, copyrights, or currency
+  symbols:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the special character
+    to appear.</li>
+  <li>Open the Insert menu and choose Characters and Symbols. You see the
+    Insert Character dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Select a category of characters.
+    <ul>
+      <li>If you choose Accent Uppercase or Accent Lowercase, then open the
+        Letter drop-down list and select the letter you wish to apply an
+        accent to. (Note: not all letters have accented forms.) Select
+        Common Symbols to insert special characters such as copyright symbols
+        or fractions.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>From the Character drop-down list, select the character you want to
+    insert.</li>
+  <li>Click Insert. 
+
+    <p>You can continue typing in your document (or in a mail compose window)
+      while you keep this dialog box open, in case you want to use it
+      again.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Close when you are done inserting special characters.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="inserting_html_elements_and_attributes">Inserting HTML Elements and
+  Attributes</h2>
+
+<p>If you understand how to work with HTML source code, you can insert
+  additional tags, style attributes, and JavaScript into your page. If you are
+  not sure how to work with HTML source code, it&apos;s best not to change it.
+  To work with HTML code, use one of these methods:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Place the insertion point where you want to insert the HTML code, or
+    select the text you want to edit, and then open the Insert menu and choose
+    HTML. In the Insert HTML dialog box, enter HTML tags and text, and then
+    click Insert.</li>
+  <li>Select an element such as a table, named anchor, image, link, or
+    horizontal line. Double-click the element to open the associated properties
+    dialog box for that item. Click Advanced Edit to open the Advanced Property
+    Editor. You can use the Advanced Property Editor to add HTML attributes,
+    JavaScript, and CSS to objects.</li>
+  <li>Open the View menu, and choose HTML Source, or click the &lt;HTML&gt;
+    Source tab in the Edit Mode toolbar at the bottom of the Composer window.
+    (If you don&apos;t see the Edit Mode toolbar, open the View menu and choose
+    Show/Hide; then make sure the Edit Mode Toolbar is checked.)</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="using_the_advanced_property_editor">Using the Advanced Property
+  Editor</h3>
+
+<p>To add HTML attributes and JavaScript to objects such as tables, images,
+  and horizontal lines, you can use the Advanced Property Editor.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Unless you clearly understand how to add, delete, or
+  modify HTML attributes and their associated values, it&apos;s best not to do
+  so.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not currently viewing the Advanced Property Editor dialog box,
+  follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>From the View menu (or the Edit Mode toolbar), choose HTML Tags.</li>
+  <li>Double-click the object that you want to modify to open its Properties
+    dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Click Advanced Edit to open the object&apos;s Advanced Property Editor.
+    The Advanced Property Editor has three tabs, each of which lists the
+    current properties for the selected object:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>HTML Attributes</strong>: Click this tab to view or enter
+        additional HTML attributes.</li>
+      <li><strong>Inline Style</strong>: Click this tab to view or enter
+        additional CSS (cascading style sheet) properties through the
+        &lt;style&gt; attribute. For more information on using CSS styles
+        in Composer, see
+        <a href="#composer">Composer Preferences -Composer</a>.</li>
+      <li><strong>JavaScript Events</strong>: Click this tab to view or enter
+        JavaScript events.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>To edit a property or attribute in any of the three lists, select the
+    attribute you want to edit. You can then edit the attribute&apos;s name
+    or value using the editable Attribute and Value fields at the bottom of
+    the dialog box. To add a new attribute, type it in the Attribute field
+    at the bottom of the dialog box. The new attribute is automatically added
+    when you click in the Value field. To remove an attribute, select it in
+    the list, and click Remove Attribute.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Required attributes are highlighted in the
+      Attribute list.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click OK to apply your changes to the Advanced Property Editor dialog
+    box.</li>
+  <li>Click OK again to exit the Properties dialog box.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Composer automatically places quotation marks around any attribute text.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="validating_the_html">Validating the HTML</h2>
+
+<p>Before you put your document on a web server so that others can see it, you
+  should first check the document&apos;s HTML formatting to make sure it
+  conforms to web standards. Documents containing validated HTML are less
+  likely to cause problems when viewed by different browsers. Just visually
+  checking your web pages in the browser doesn&apos;t ensure that your document
+  will appear correctly when viewed in other web browsers.</p>
+
+<p>Composer provides a convenient way for you to check that your document
+  conforms to W3C (World Wide Web Consortium) HTML standards. Composer uses
+  the W3C HTML Validation Service, which checks your document&apos;s HTML
+  syntax for compliance with HTML 4.01 standards. This service also provides
+  information on how to correct errors.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: You must be connected to the Internet to use this
+  feature.</p>
+
+<p>To validate your document&apos;s HTML syntax:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Tools menu, and choose Validate HTML. If you have unsaved
+    changes, Composer asks you to save them before proceeding.</li>
+  <li>When the W3C HTML Validation Service page appears, click <q>Browse</q>
+    and locate the file on your hard disk that you want to validate.</li>
+  <li>Click <q>Check</q>.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="choosing_the_right_editing_mode">Choosing the Right Editing Mode</h2>
+
+<p>Typically, you won&apos;t need to change the editing mode from the default
+  (Normal). However, if you want to work with the document&apos;s HTML source
+  code, you may want to change editing modes.</p>
+
+<p>Composer allows you to quickly switch between four editing modes or views.
+  Each editing mode allows you to continue working on your document, but
+  displays varying levels of HTML tags (and tag icons).</p>
+
+<p>Before you choose an editing mode:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Open the View menu, choose Show/Hide, and then make sure there is a
+    checkmark next to Edit Mode Toolbar.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>The Edit Mode toolbar has four tabs:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Normal</strong>: Choose this editing mode to see how the document
+    will look online while you are creating it. Choose this mode to
+    show table borders and named anchor icons. All other HTML tag icons
+    are hidden.</li>
+  <li><strong>HTML Tags</strong>: Choose this mode to show all HTML tag
+    icons.</li>
+  <li><strong>&lt;HTML&gt; Source</strong>: Choose this mode to view and edit
+    the document as unformatted HTML source code. When you save the
+    document, the Normal mode reappears.</li>
+  <li><strong>Preview</strong>: Choose this mode to display and edit the
+    document exactly as it would appear in a browser window, except
+    that links and JavaScript functions will not be active.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: JavaScript functions, frames, links, Java,
+  embedded objects and animated GIF files are not active in any of
+  the editing modes. To display these items in their active
+  state, click the Browse button on the Composition toolbar to
+  load the page into a browser window.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h1 id="adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Adding Tables to Your Web Page</h1>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#inserting_a_table">Inserting a Table</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#changing_a_tables_properties">Changing a Table&apos;s
+      Properties</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#adding_and_deleting_rows_columns_and_cells">Adding and
+      Deleting Rows, Columns, and Cells</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#selecting_table_elements">Selecting Table Elements</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#moving_copying_and_deleting_tables">Moving, Copying, and
+      Deleting Tables</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#converting_text_into_a_table">Converting Text into a
+      Table</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="inserting_a_table">Inserting a Table</h2>
+
+<p>Tables are useful for organizing text, pictures, and data into formatted
+  rows and columns. To insert a table:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the table to appear.</li>
+  <li>Click the Table button
+    <img src="images/table.gif" width="25" height="26" alt="" /> on the
+    Composition toolbar. The Insert Table dialog box appears.</li>
+  <li>Type the number of rows and columns you want.
+    <ul>
+      <li>(Optional) Enter a size for the table width, and select either
+        percentage of the window or pixels.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Enter a number for the border thickness (in pixels); enter zero for no
+    border.
+  
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Composer uses a red dotted line to indicate
+      tables with a zero border; the dotted line disappears when the page
+      is viewed in a browser.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>To apply additional table attributes or JavaScript, click Advanced Edit
+    to display the
+    <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>.
+  </li>
+  <li>Click OK to confirm your settings and view your new table.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To change additional properties for your new table, see
+  <a href="#changing_a_tables_properties">Changing a Table&apos;s
+  Properties</a>.
+</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To insert a table within a table, open the
+  Insert menu and choose Table.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="changing_a_tables_properties">Changing a Table&apos;s Properties</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to modify properties that apply to an entire
+  table as well as the rows, columns, or individual cells within a table. If
+  you are not currently viewing the Table Properties dialog box, follow these
+  steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the table, or click anywhere inside it.</li>
+  <li>Click the Table button
+    <img src="images/table.gif" width="25" height="26" alt="" /> on the
+    toolbar, or open the Table menu and choose Table Properties. The Table
+    Properties dialog box contains two tabs: Table and Cells.</li>
+  <li>Click the Table tab to edit these properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Size</strong>: Use this to specify the number of rows and
+        columns. Enter the width of the table and then choose <q>% of
+        window</q> or <q>pixels</q>. If you specify width as a percentage, the
+        table&apos;s width changes whenever the Composer window&apos;s or
+        browser window&apos;s width changes.</li>
+      <li><strong>Borders and Spacing</strong>: Use this to specify, in pixels,
+        the border line width, the space between cells, and the cell padding
+        (the space between the contents of the cell and its border).
+
+        <p><strong>Note</strong>: Composer uses a dotted outline to display
+          tables with a zero border; the dotted line disappears when the page
+          is viewed in a browser.</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Table Alignment</strong>: Use this to align the table within
+        the page. Choose an option from the drop-down list.</li>
+      <li><strong>Caption</strong>: Choose the caption placement from the
+        drop-down list.</li>
+      <li><strong>Background Color</strong>: Use this to choose a color for
+        the table background, or leave it as transparent.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit
+    to display the <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced
+    Property Editor</a>.
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, or
+    click OK to confirm them.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To view, change, or add properties for one or more cells:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the row, column, or cell, then open the Table menu and choose
+    Table Properties. The Table Properties dialog box appears.</li>
+  <li>Click the Cells tab to edit the following properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Selection</strong>: Choose Cell, Row, or Column from the
+        drop-down list. Click Previous or Next to move through rows, columns,
+        or cells.</li>
+      <li><strong>Size</strong>: Type a number for Height and Width, and then
+        choose <q>% of table</q> or <q>pixels</q>.</li>
+      <li><strong>Content Alignment</strong>: Select a vertical and horizontal
+        alignment type for the text or data inside each cell.</li>
+      <li><strong>Cell Style</strong>: Select Header from the drop-down list
+        for column or row headers (which centers and bolds the text in the
+        cell); otherwise choose Normal.</li>
+      <li><strong>Text Wrap</strong>: Select <q>Don&apos;t wrap</q> from the
+        drop-down list to keep text from wrapping to the next line unless you
+        insert a paragraph break. Otherwise, choose Wrap.</li>
+      <li><strong>Background Color</strong>: Select a color for the cell
+        background or leave it as transparent.
+
+        <p><strong>Note</strong>: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript
+          events, click Advanced Edit to display the
+          <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property
+          Editor</a>
+        </p>
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, or
+    click OK to confirm them.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To change the text color or background color of one
+  or more selected cells or the entire table, select the cells or click
+  anywhere in the table and then click the text color or background color
+  icon in the Format toolbar.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To change the color of cells to the color last used,
+  select the cell, then press Shift and click on the background color picker.
+  This is useful when you want to use one color for individual cells.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="adding_and_deleting_rows_columns_and_cells">Adding and Deleting Rows,
+  Columns, and Cells</h2>
+
+<p>Composer allows you to quickly add or delete one or more cells, columns,
+  or rows in a table. In addition, you can set options that allow you to
+  maintain the original rectangular structure or layout of the table while
+  you perform editing tasks.</p>
+
+<p>To add a cell, row, or column to your table:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click inside the table where you want to add a cell (or cells).</li>
+  <li>Open the Table menu and then choose Insert.</li>
+  <li>Choose one of the cell groupings. (You can also insert a new table
+    within a table cell.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To delete a cell, row, or column:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click a row, column, or cell to place the insertion point. Or,
+    select neighboring cells to delete more than one row at a time. To
+    select neighboring cells, drag over the cells you want to select.
+    To select individual cells in a table, hold down the
+    <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Ctrl</kbd> key and click
+    on the cells you want to select.</li>
+  <li>Open the Table menu and choose Delete.</li>
+  <li>Choose the item you want to delete.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To join (or merge) a cell with the cell on its right:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click inside the cell on the left, open the Table menu, and
+    choose Join with Cell to the Right.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To join (or merge) adjacent cells:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Select adjacent cells by dragging over them.</li>
+  <li>Open the Table menu, and choose Join Selected Cells.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To split a joined cell back into two or more cells:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click inside the joined cell, open the Table menu, and then
+    choose Split Cell. Composer puts the entire contents of the joined
+    cell into the first of the two cells.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Refer to <a href="#selecting_table_elements">Selecting Table Elements</a>
+  for information on how to select non-adjacent cells, rows, and
+  columns.</p>
+
+<h3 id="changing_the_default_table_editing_behavior">Changing the Default Table
+  Editing Behavior</h3>
+
+<p>By default, when you delete one or more cells, Composer preserves the
+  table&apos;s structure by adding cells at the end of a row, wherever
+  needed. This allows you to delete one or more cells but still maintain
+  the table&apos;s original rectangular layout, or structure. Otherwise,
+  deleting cells can result in a table with empty spaces, or whose outline
+  appears irregular due to an uneven number of cells.</p>
+
+<p>To change the default table editing behavior, begin from the Composer
+  window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu, choose Preferences, and then choose
+    Composer.</li>
+  <li>Under Editing, set the following preference:
+    <ul>
+      <li>Make sure that <q>Maintain table layout when inserting or
+        deleting cells</q> is checked to ensure that you don&apos;t get an
+        irregularly shaped table.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li class="win">Click OK.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="selecting_table_elements">Selecting Table Elements</h2>
+
+<p>You can use one of two ways to quickly select a table, cell, or group of
+  cells:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click in the table, open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose
+    an item from the submenu. For example, to select a table, click anywhere
+    inside the table, open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose
+    Table.</li>
+  <li>Or, you can use the mouse as a selection tool:
+    <ul>
+      <li>To select a group of adjacent cells: click in a cell, and then
+        drag to select the cells you want. Drag the mouse left or right to
+        select a row; up or down to select a column.</li>
+      <li>To select non-adjacent cells: press <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd>
+        <kbd class="noMac">Ctrl</kbd> and then click inside a cell. Keep
+        pressing <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd> <kbd class="noMac">Ctrl</kbd>
+        as you click to select additional cells.</li>
+      <li>To extend a selection to include adjacent cells: click inside a
+        cell and then drag over additional cells to extend the selection.</li>
+      <li>To select one or more adjacent columns or rows: drag up or down
+        to select the first column or row, and then drag left or right to
+        select additional adjacent columns or rows. Press <kbd>Shift</kbd>
+        and drag to the right to select an entire row. Press <kbd>Shift</kbd>
+        and drag up or down to select an entire column.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="moving_copying_and_deleting_tables">Moving, Copying, and Deleting
+  Tables</h2>
+
+<p>To move a table:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click inside the table.</li>
+  <li>Open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose Table.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>To copy or move the table: Use the Edit menu&apos;s cut, copy, and
+    paste options.</li>
+  <li>To delete the table: Open the Table menu again, choose Delete, and
+    then choose Table.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="converting_text_into_a_table">Converting Text into a Table</h2>
+
+<p>To convert text into a table:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the text that you want to convert into a table. Keep in mind that
+    Composer creates a new table row for each paragraph in the selection.</li>
+  <li>Open the Table menu and choose Create Table from Selection. You see the
+    Convert to Table dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Choose the character Composer uses to separate the selection into
+    columns, or specify a different character to use. If you choose Space as
+    the separator for columns, choose whether or not you want Composer to
+    ignore multiple space and treat them as one space.</li>
+  <li>Leave <q>Delete separator character</q> checked to have Composer remove
+    the separator character when it converts the text into a table. If you
+    don&apos;t want Composer to delete the separator character, uncheck this
+    option.</li>
+  <li>Click OK.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Text formatting is removed when the selected text
+  is converted to a table.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h1 id="adding_images_to_your_web_page">Adding Pictures (Images) to Your Web
+  Page</h1>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#inserting_an_image_into_your_page">Inserting an Image into
+      Your Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#editing_image_properties">Editing Image Properties</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="inserting_an_image_into_your_page">Inserting an Image into Your
+  Page</h2>
+
+<p>You can insert GIF, JPEG, BMP, and PNG (Portable Network Graphics) images
+  into your web page. You can also use them to
+  <a href="#using_images_as_links">create links</a>. When you insert an image,
+  Composer saves a reference to the image in your page.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: If you plan to publish your pages to the web,
+  it&apos;s best not to use BMP images in your pages.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: It&apos;s best to first save or publish your page
+  before you insert images into it. This allows Composer to automatically
+  use relative references to images once you insert them.</p>
+
+<p>To insert an image:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the image to
+    appear.</li>
+  <li>Click the Image button
+    <img src="images/image.gif" width="23" height="25" alt="" />
+    on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Image. You see the
+    Image Properties dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Type the location and filename of the image file, or click Choose File
+    to search for an image file on your hard drive or network.</li>
+  <li>Type a simple description of your image as the alternate text that will
+    appear in text-only browsers (as well as other browsers) when an image is
+    loading or when image loading is disabled. 
+
+    <p>Alternatively, you can choose not to include alternate text.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>If needed, click other tabs so you can adjust the settings (for
+    example, alignment) in the
+    <a href="#editing_image_properties">Image Properties</a> dialog box.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To quickly insert an image: Drag and drop it onto
+  your page.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To insert a line break after all images in a
+  paragraph, choose Break Below Images from the Insert menu.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_images_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="editing_image_properties">Editing Image Properties</h2>
+
+<p>Once you&apos;ve inserted an image into your page, you can edit its
+  properties and customize the layout in your page, such as the height,
+  width, spacing, and text alignment. If you are not currently viewing
+  the Image Properties dialog box, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Double-click the image, or select it and click the Image button
+    <img src="images/image.gif" width="23" height="25" alt="" /> on the toolbar
+    to display the Image Properties dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Click the Location tab to edit these properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Image Location</strong>: Type the filename and location of
+        the image file. Click Choose File to search for an image file on your
+        hard drive or network.</li>
+      <li><strong>URL is relative to page location</strong>: If checked,
+        Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page&apos;s location.
+        This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages on a web
+        server so that others can view them. Using relative URLs allows you
+        to keep all your linked files in the same place relative to each other,
+        regardless of their location on your hard disk or a web server.
+
+        <p>Unchecking this box causes Composer to convert the URL to a full
+          (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking to
+          images on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard
+          disk).</p>
+
+        <p>If you have never saved or published the page, you must first save
+          the page in order to enable this checkbox. (This checkbox is not
+          available if you open the Image Properties dialog box in a message
+          compose window.)</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Attach this image to the message</strong>: If checked,
+        the image is attached to the message you are sending. If unchecked, a
+        link to the image location is inserted instead. (This checkbox is only
+        available if you open the Image Properties dialog box in a message
+        compose window.)</li>
+      <li><strong>Alternate Text</strong>: Enter text that will display in
+        place of the original image; for example, a caption or a brief
+        description of the image. It&apos;s a good practice to specify
+        alternate text for readers who use text-only web browsers or who have
+        image loading turned off.</li>
+      <li><strong>Don&apos;t use alternate text</strong>: Choose this option
+        if the image does not require alternate text or if you don&apos;t want
+        to include it.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click the Dimensions tab to edit these properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Actual Size</strong>: Select this option to undo any changes
+        you&apos;ve made to the dimensions and return the image to its original
+        size.</li>
+      <li><strong>Custom Size</strong>: Select this option and specify the new
+        height and width, in pixels or as a percentage. This setting
+        doesn&apos;t affect the original image file, just the image inserted
+        in your page.</li>
+      <li><strong>Constrain</strong>: If you change the image size, it&apos;s
+        a good idea to select this in order to maintain the image&apos;s aspect
+        ratio (so that it doesn&apos;t appear distorted). If you choose this
+        option, then you only need to change the height or width, but not
+        both.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click the Appearance Tab to edit these properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Spacing</strong>: Specify the amount of space surrounding
+        the image; between the image and adjoining text. You can also put a
+        solid black border around the image and specify its width in pixels.
+        Specify zero for no border.</li>
+      <li><strong>Align Text to Image</strong>: If you&apos;ve placed your
+        image next to any text, select an alignment icon to indicate how you
+        want text positioned relative to the image.</li>
+      <li><strong>Image Map</strong>: Click Remove to remove any image map
+        settings.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click the Link tab to edit these properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Enter a web page location</strong>: If you want to define
+        a link for this image, enter the URL of a remote or local page, or
+        select a named anchor or heading from the drop-down list. Click Choose
+        File to search for a file on your hard drive or network.</li>
+      <li><strong>URL is relative to page location</strong>: If checked,
+        Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page&apos;s location.
+        This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages to a web
+        server so that others can view them. Using relative URLs allows you to
+        keep all your linked files in the same place relative to each other,
+        regardless of their location on your hard disk or a web server.
+
+        <p>Unchecking this box causes Composer to convert the URL to a full
+          (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking to files
+          on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard disk).</p>
+
+        <p>If you have unsaved changes, you must first save the page in order
+          to enable this checkbox. (This checkbox is not available if you open
+          the Image Properties dialog box in a message compose window.)</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Show border around linked image</strong>: If checked,
+        displays the link highlight color around the image.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit
+    to display the
+    <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>.
+  </li>
+  <li>Click OK to confirm your changes.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_images_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h1 id="setting_page_properties">Setting Page Properties</h1>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#setting_page_properties_and_meta_tags">Setting Page
+      Properties and Meta Tags</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#setting_page_colors_and_backgrounds">Setting Page Colors and
+      Backgrounds</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="setting_page_properties_and_meta_tags">Setting Page Properties and Meta
+  Tags</h2>
+
+<p>Use the Page Properties dialog box to enter properties such as the title,
+  author, and description of the document you&apos;re currently working on.
+  This information is useful if you plan to use the page on a website, since
+  search engines use this type of information to index your page. You can view
+  this information from the browser window by opening the View menu and
+  choosing Page Info.</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Page Title and Properties.</li>
+  <li>Edit any of the following properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Title</strong>: Type the text you want to appear as the
+        window title when someone views the page through a browser. This
+        is how most web search tools locate web pages, so choose a title
+        that conveys what your page is about.</li>
+      <li><strong>Author</strong>: Type the name of the person who created the
+        document. This information is helpful to readers who locate the
+        document by using a web search tool to search on name. 
+
+        <p><strong>Tip</strong>: If you enter the Author name in
+          Composer&apos;s <a href="#new_page_settings">preferences</a>, then
+          you won&apos;t have to enter it each time you create a new page.</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Description</strong>: Enter a brief description of the
+        document&apos;s contents.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#setting_page_properties">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="setting_page_colors_and_backgrounds">Setting Page Colors and
+  Backgrounds</h2>
+
+<p>You can change the background color or specify a background
+  image for the page you&apos;re currently working on. These choices
+  affect the way text and links in your page appear to people viewing
+  the page through a browser.</p>
+
+<p>To set the colors and background for the current page, begin
+  from the Composer window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Page Colors and Background.</li>
+  <li>Edit any of the following properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Reader&apos;s default colors</strong>: Select this if you
+        want your page to use the color settings from the viewer&apos;s browser
+        for text and links.</li>
+      <li><strong>Use custom colors</strong>: Select this if you want to
+        specify the colors of text and links. For each element, select a color
+        from the Color selection dialog. Sample output for each type of link
+        appears in the pane on the right.</li>
+      <li><strong>Background image</strong>: Select this if you want the
+        background of your page to be an image. Type the name of the image
+        file or click Choose File to locate the image file on your hard
+        drive or network. 
+
+        <p><strong>Note</strong>: Background images are tiled and override
+          background color selections.</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>URL is relative to page location</strong>: If checked,
+        Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page&apos;s location.
+        This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages on a web
+        server so that others can view them. 
+
+        <p>Using relative URLs allows you to keep all your linked files in
+          the same place relative to each other, regardless of their location
+          on your hard disk or a web server.</p>
+
+        <p>Deselecting this option causes Composer to convert the URL to a
+          full (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking
+          to images on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard
+          disk).</p>
+
+        <p>If you have unsaved changes, you must first save the page in
+          order to enable this checkbox.</p>
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events,
+  click Advanced Edit to display the
+  <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property
+  Editor</a>.</p>
+
+<p>You can also set the <a href="#new_page_settings">default page
+  background and colors</a> for every new page you create in Composer.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#setting_page_properties">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h1 id="creating_links_in_composer">Creating Links in Composer</h1>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#creating_links_within_the_same_page">Creating Links Within
+      the Same Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#creating_links_to_other_pages">Creating Links to Other
+      Pages</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#using_images_as_links">Using Images as Links</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#removing_or_discontinuing_links">Removing or Discontinuing
+      Links</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="creating_links_within_the_same_page">Creating Links Within the Same
+  Page</h2>
+
+<p>To create a link within the same page, for example a link that the reader
+  can use to jump from one section to another, you must create an
+  <em>anchor</em> (target location), and then create a link that points to the
+  anchor. Anchors are also called <em>named anchors</em>. To create an anchor,
+  follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point at the beginning of a line where you
+    want to create an anchor, or select some text.</li>
+  <li>Open the Insert menu and choose Named Anchor. You see the Named Anchor
+    Properties dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Type a unique name for the anchor in the Anchor Name field (up to 30
+    characters). If you include spaces, they will be converted to underscores
+    ( _ ). If you selected some text in step 1, this box already contains a
+    name.</li>
+  <li>Click OK. An anchor icon appears in your document to mark the
+    anchor&apos;s location:
+    <img src="images/anchor-in-doc.gif" width="20" height="17" alt="" /></li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To create the link on which readers can click to jump to the object:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the text or image that you want to link to the anchor.</li>
+  <li>Click the Link button or open the Insert menu and choose Link. You see
+    the Link Properties dialog box.
+    <ul>
+      <li>If you&apos;re creating a link to an HTML file on your computer,
+        click Choose File to locate it.</li>
+      <li>If you&apos;re creating a link to a named anchor (target), select
+        it from the list of the anchors currently available in the page.</li>
+      <li>If you&apos;re creating a link to a level heading (for example,
+        Heading 1 - Heading 6), select it from the list of headings currently
+        available in the page.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click OK.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: To test the link you just created, open the File
+  menu and choose Browse Page, then click the link.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: If you did not first create named anchors, you can
+  use the Link dialog box to create links to headings that already occur in
+  the page.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="creating_links_to_other_pages">Creating Links to Other Pages</h2>
+
+<p>You can create links from your page to local pages on your own computer or
+  on your workplace&apos;s network, or to remote pages on the Internet.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: It&apos;s best to first save or publish your page
+  before you create links to other pages. This allows Composer to automatically
+  use relative references for links once you create them.</p>
+
+<p>To create a link to another page:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want to create a link, or
+    select the text or image that you want to link to the anchor.</li>
+  <li>Click the Link button. You see the Link Properties dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Define your link:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Link text</strong>: If you&apos;ve already selected an image
+        file or text before clicking the Link button, the selected text or
+        file will be entered here. Otherwise, you must enter the text that you
+        want to use as the link.</li>
+      <li><strong>Link Location</strong>: Type the local path and filename or
+        remote URL of the page you want to link to. If you&apos;re not sure of
+        the path and filename for a local file, click Choose File to look for
+        it on your hard disk or network. For remote URLs, you can copy the URL
+        from the browser&apos;s Location Bar. Alternatively, you can select a
+        named anchor or a heading in the current page that you want to link
+        to.</li>
+      <li><strong>URL is relative to page location</strong>: If checked,
+        Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page&apos;s location.
+        This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages to a web
+        server so that others can view them. Using relative URLs allows you to
+        keep all your linked files in the same place relative to each other,
+        regardless of their location on your hard disk or a web server.
+
+        <p>Deselecting this option causes Composer to convert the URL to a full
+          (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking to pages
+          on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard disk).</p>
+
+        <p>If you have unsaved changes, you must first save the page in order
+          to enable this checkbox. (This checkbox is not available if you open
+          the Link Properties dialog box in a message compose window.)</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Attach the source of this link to the message</strong>: If
+        checked, the source of the specified link is added as an attachment to
+        the message you are sending. If unchecked, just a link to the location
+        is inserted instead. (This checkbox is only available if you open the
+        Link Properties dialog box in a message compose window.)</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit
+    to display the
+    <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>.
+  </li>
+  <li>Click OK.</li>
+  <li>To test the link you just created, click the Browse button and then click
+    the link to make sure it works as expected.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can copy a link quickly by clicking and dragging
+  the link from another window and then dropping it onto your page. For
+  example, you can click and drag a link from a web page, bookmark, or Mail
+  window and drop it onto your page. You can also right-click<span class="mac">
+  or, if you have a one-button mouse, <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-click</span> a link on a
+  web page and choose Copy Link Location from the menu. Then you can paste the
+  link location into the Link Location field in the Link Properties dialog
+  box.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="using_images_as_links">Using Images as Links</h2>
+
+<p>You can make images, such as JPEG, GIF, or PNG files, behave like links in
+  your pages. When the reader clicks a linked image, the browser window
+  displays the page that the image is linked to.</p>
+
+<p>To make an image behaving like a link:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select an image on your page.</li>
+  <li>Click the Link button
+    <img src="images/link.gif" width="22" height="20" alt="" />
+    on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Link.</li>
+  <li>Use the Link Properties dialog box to link the image to a
+    <a href="#creating_links_within_the_same_page">named anchor or heading
+    within the page</a>, or to a
+    <a href="#creating_links_to_other_pages">separate local or remote page</a>.
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: Drag and drop a linked image from the browser window
+  into a Composer window to copy both the image and the link.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: To remove the blue border that can appear around
+  images used as links:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the linked image.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Image and Link Properties.</li>
+  <li>In the dialog box, select the Link tab.</li>
+  <li>Uncheck <q>Show border around linked image</q>.</li>
+  <li>Click OK.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="removing_or_discontinuing_links">Removing or Discontinuing Links</h2>
+
+<p>To remove a link:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the linked text (normally blue and underlined) or image.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Remove Links.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To discontinue a link, so that text you type after the link is not included
+  as part of the link:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the link to end.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Link.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+ 
+<h1 id="publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Publishing Your Pages on the Web</h1>
+
+<p>If your pages exist only on your local hard disk, you can browse your pages,
+  but no one else can. Composer lets you publish your pages to a remote
+  computer called a web server.</p>
+
+<p>When you publish your pages to a web server, Composer copies (uploads) your
+  pages to a computer that lets others browse your pages. Most ISPs provide
+  space on their web servers for web page publishing. To find a web server
+  where you can publish your pages, ask your ISP, help desk, or system
+  administrator.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#publishing_a_document">Publishing a Document</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#updating_a_published_document">Updating a Published
+      Document</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#changing_the_filename_or_publishing_location">Changing the
+      Filename or Publishing Location</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#creating_a_new_publishing_site">Creating a New Publishing
+      Site</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#choosing_the_default_publishing_site">Choosing the Default
+      Publishing Site</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#deleting_a_publishing_site">Deleting a Publishing
+      Site</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#solving_common_publishing_problems">Solving Common Publishing
+      Problems</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#publishing_settings">Publishing Settings</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="publishing_a_document">Publishing a Document</h2>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: It&apos;s best to first save or publish your page
+  before you insert links or images into it. This allows Composer to
+  automatically use relative references for links and images once you insert
+  them.</p>
+
+<p>To publish a document:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the HTML document that you want to publish, or create a new Composer
+    document.</li>
+  <li>When you&apos;re ready to publish the document remotely, click the
+    Publish button.
+
+    <p>If you have published this document before, Composer remembers the
+      document&apos;s publishing settings and starts publishing the document.
+      While publishing is in progress, Composer displays a publishing status
+      dialog box.</p>
+    <ul>
+      <li>If you have never published this document before, Composer displays
+        the Settings tab in the Publish Page dialog box so you can enter
+        information about the document&apos;s remote publishing location. See
+        <a href="#publish_page_settings">Publish Page - Settings</a> for more
+        information. When you&apos;re done entering information, click Publish.
+      </li>
+      <li>If you have never saved the document, Composer displays the Publish
+        tab in the Publish Page dialog box, so you can enter the
+        document&apos;s filename. See
+        <a href="#publish_page_publish">Publish Page - Publish</a> for more
+        information. After entering the filename, click Publish.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>To browse your published page, click the Browse button. Test the
+    page&apos;s links and make sure there are no missing images.</li>
+  <li>Continue editing the page as necessary. When you&apos;re ready to update
+    the remote page with your changes, click the Publish button.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>When you publish a document for the first time, Composer changes the
+  document&apos;s <tt>file:///</tt> URL to an <tt>http://</tt> URL to indicate
+  that you are now editing the published document. If you want to save the
+  document locally (on your computer&apos;s hard disk), click the Save button.
+  You&apos;ll be prompted to choose a filename and location on your hard disk
+  for the document.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="tips_for_avoiding_broken_links_or_missing_images">Tips for Avoiding
+  Broken Links or Missing Images</h3>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Make sure your Composer filenames end with the .html or .htm file
+    extension. Make sure your image filenames end with the .JPG, .GIF, or .PNG
+    file extension. Don&apos;t use spaces or other special symbols in your
+    filenames. Keep your filenames short and only use lowercase or uppercase
+    letters and numbers.</li>
+  <li>If your images appear as broken links when you browse a document on the
+    web server, you may have forgotten to include the images when you
+    published. Open the File menu, and choose Publish As to display the Publish
+    Page dialog box. In the Publish tab, make sure you check <q>Include images
+    and other files</q> and then click Publish.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>For more troubleshooting tips, see
+  <a href="#solving_common_publishing_problems">Solving Common Publishing
+  Problems</a>.
+</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="updating_a_published_document">Updating a Published Document</h2>
+
+<p>To update a published document:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>In a Composer window, open the File menu, and choose Recent Pages, then
+    select the document from the list. <p>Alternatively, browse to the location
+    of the document you want to update by entering the document&apos;s HTTP
+    address (the document&apos;s web address) in the browser&apos;s
+    Location Bar.</p></li>
+  <li>Edit the document as necessary.</li>
+  <li>When you&apos;re ready to update the remote page with your changes, click
+    Publish in Composer&apos;s toolbar.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To delete a page or image you&apos;ve published on a
+  web server, you must use an <a href="glossary.xhtml#ftp">FTP (File Transfer
+  Protocol)</a> program. You also must use an FTP program if you want to create
+  subdirectories or to rename files on the web server. Ask your service
+  provider if they recommend a particular FTP program. You can usually find
+  information on FTP programs in the Help or Support sections of your service
+  provider&apos;s website. FTP programs are also available from shareware sites
+  such as ZDNet Downloads.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="changing_the_filename_or_publishing_location">Changing the Filename or
+  Publishing Location</h2>
+
+<p>To change a document&apos;s filename or publishing location:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>In a Composer window, open the File menu, and choose Recent Pages, then
+    select the document from the list.
+
+    <p>Alternatively, browse to the location of the document you want to update
+      by entering the document&apos;s HTTP address (the document&apos;s web
+      address) in the browser&apos;s Location Bar.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>Edit the document as necessary.</li>
+  <li>Open Composer&apos;s File menu and choose Publish As. Composer displays
+    the Publish tab in the Publish Page dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Enter a different page title, if necessary.</li>
+  <li>Enter a different filename for the page, if necessary.</li>
+  <li>From the Site Name list, choose the publishing location you want to use.
+    To set up a new publishing location, click New Site. See
+    <a href="#publish_page_settings">Publish Page - Settings</a> for more
+    information.</li>
+  <li>Click Publish to save the document to the new location.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="creating_a_new_publishing_site">Creating a New Publishing Site</h2>
+
+<p>If you plan to publish documents to more than one remote location, you can
+  set up Composer to save the publishing information for each remote site you
+  use, so that you don&apos;t have to enter it each time you want to
+  publish.</p>
+
+<p>To create a new publishing site, begin from a Composer window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings. Composer
+    displays the Publish Settings dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Click New Site.</li>
+  <li>For <q>Site Name</q>, enter the nickname by which you want to refer to
+    this publishing site. 
+
+    <p>For example, if you will use the new site to publish documents
+      related to the <q>Meteor</q> project, you might want to use the site
+      name <q>Meteor</q>. Site names remind you about the types of documents
+      you publish at each site.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>For <q>Publishing address</q>, enter the complete URL provided to
+    you by your ISP, system administrator, or web hosting service. This
+    URL must begin with either <tt>ftp://</tt> or <tt>http://</tt>. 
+
+    <p>The publishing address specifies the location where documents are
+      published (uploaded) at this site. If you are not sure what to enter,
+      ask your ISP or system administrator.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>For <q>HTTP address of your home page</q>, enter the complete URL
+    that you would enter in the browser to view pages at this
+    site. Do not include a filename or subdirectory as part of the URL.
+
+    <p>This URL must always begin with <tt>http://</tt>. In some cases,
+      this URL is the same as the publishing address. If you are not sure
+      what to enter, ask your ISP or system administrator, or else leave
+      it blank.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>For <q>user name</q>, enter the user name you use to log in to your ISP
+    or web hosting service.</li>
+  <li>For <q>password</q>, enter the password for your user name.</li>
+  <li>Select <q>Save Password</q> to save your password securely using
+    Password Manager so that you don&apos;t have to enter it each time you
+    publish pages at this site.</li>
+  <li>Click OK.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="choosing_the_default_publishing_site">Choosing the Default Publishing
+  Site</h2>
+
+<p>If you have set up more than one publishing site, but you typically use
+  only one site for most of your publishing needs, you can designate the site
+  you use most often as the default publishing site. Composer will use the
+  default publishing site for all documents that you publish, unless you
+  specifically choose an alternate site.</p>
+
+<p>Regardless of how many sites you&apos;ve set up, you can always publish a
+  document to a different site by choosing Publish As from Composer&apos;s
+  File menu. See
+  <a href="#changing_the_filename_or_publishing_location">Changing the Filename
+  or Publishing Location</a> for more information.</p>
+
+<p>To choose the default publishing site, begin from a Composer
+  window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu, and choose Publishing Site Settings.
+    Composer displays the Publish Settings dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Select a publishing site from the list. 
+
+    <p>If you only have one publishing site set up, Composer uses that
+      one as the default site.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Set as Default.</li>
+  <li>Click OK to confirm your changes.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="deleting_a_publishing_site">Deleting a Publishing Site</h2>
+
+<p>Deleting a publishing site removes the site&apos;s settings from Composer.
+  If you later wish to publish to the site, you must re-enter the site&apos;s
+  settings.</p>
+
+<p>To delete a publishing site&apos;s settings, begin from a Composer
+  window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu, and choose Publishing Site Settings. Composer
+    displays the Publish Settings dialog box.</li>
+  <li>Select a publishing site from the list.</li>
+  <li>Click Remove Site.
+
+    <p>Composer only removes the site&apos;s settings; the remote site itself
+      is not affected.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click OK to confirm your changes.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="solving_common_publishing_problems">Solving Common Publishing
+  Problems</h2>
+
+<p>If one or more of your files fail to publish, the Publishing
+  Status dialog box displays an error message that can help you
+  determine what went wrong and how to fix it.</p>
+
+<p>If you are still unable to publish a file, save the file to your
+  hard disk by opening Composer&apos;s File menu, and choosing Save. You
+  can then open the file at a later time to try to publish it. To
+  quickly locate the file later, open Composer&apos;s File menu, and
+  choose Recent Pages.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#verifying_your_publishing_settings">Verifying Your Publishing
+      Settings</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#checking_your_filenames">Checking Your Filenames</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#fixing_publishing_errors">Fixing Publishing Errors</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="verifying_your_publishing_settings">Verifying Your Publishing
+  Settings</h3>
+
+<p>To verify your publishing settings:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Close the Publishing Status dialog box, if it is open.</li>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings.</li>
+  <li>In the Publish Settings dialog box, confirm that the site settings are
+    correct for the site you are trying to publish to. If you&apos;re not
+    sure, check with your ISP or web hosting service.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Verify that you correctly entered the publishing
+        settings</strong>: You may have accidentally mis-typed one of the
+        settings.</li>
+      <li><strong>Verify that you entered the correct publishing
+        address</strong>: Web hosting services or ISPs may refer to the
+        publishing address as the <q>server name</q>, the <q>hostname</q>, or
+        the <q>server/host</q>. They often specify the publishing location as
+        <tt>ftp.myisp.com/username</tt>, where <tt>username</tt> is your
+        user name. 
+
+        <p>For the publishing address to be correct, you must precede the
+          publishing location with either <tt>ftp://</tt> or <tt>http://</tt>.
+          For example, the correct publishing address for the above-mentioned
+          site would be <tt>ftp://ftp.myisp.com/username</tt>.</p>
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<h3 id="checking_your_filenames">Checking Your Filenames</h3>
+
+<p>Examine the names of any files that failed to publish. Make sure that the
+  filenames:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Use only numbers or lowercase or uppercase letters. While it&apos;s
+    acceptable to create filenames that use uppercase letters, you can avoid
+    potential errors in later locating the published file if you only use
+    lowercase letters in your filenames. 
+
+    <p>When you publish files to a web server, filenames become
+      case-sensitive on the web server. It may be harder for you to remember
+      files names that use only uppercase letters or that use a mix of
+      uppercase and lowercase letters.</p>
+
+    <p>For example, when you try to locate a published file by typing the
+      filename&apos;s web address into the browser&apos;s Location Bar, you
+      must enter the filename exactly as you created it, using the same
+      combination of uppercase and lowercase letters.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>Don&apos;t use punctuation characters or spaces. Underscores ( _ )
+    or hyphens ( - ) are OK.</li>
+  <li>End with .html or .htm (for Composer filenames).</li>
+  <li>Use less than 32 characters.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="fixing_publishing_errors">Fixing Publishing Errors</h3>
+
+<p>If one or more of your files fails to publish, look at the messages 
+  Composer displays in the Publishing Status area of the Publishing dialog box.
+  You can use these error messages to help determine what went wrong and what
+  to do to fix the problem.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+  <p>Error Messages:</p>
+  <p><a href="#file_not_found"><tt><var>Filename</var> not found.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#file_not_found"><tt><var>X</var> of <var>Y</var> files failed to
+    publish.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#subdir_not_found"><tt>The subdirectory <var>directory name</var>
+    doesn&apos;t exist on this site or the filename <var>filename</var> is
+    already in use by another subdirectory.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#subdir_not_found"><tt>The filename <var>filename</var> is
+    already in use by another subdirectory.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#server_not_found"><tt>The server is not available. Check your
+    connection and try again later.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#no_permission"><tt>You do not have permission to publish to this
+    location.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#offline_error"><tt>You are currently offline. Click the icon
+    near the lower-right corner of any window to go online.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#no_disk_space"><tt>There is not enough disk space available to
+    save the file <var>filename</var>.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#name_too_long"><tt>The filename or subdirectory name is too
+    long.</tt></a></p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="file_not_found"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt><var>Filename</var> not found.</tt> 
+    <p>or</p>
+    <tt><var>X</var> of <var>Y</var> files failed to publish.</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: One or more image files or CSS files
+    failed to publish because Composer could not find them. Some typical
+    reasons might be:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>The file location you typed is incorrect.</li>
+    <li>The file&apos;s location on the web is not accessible.</li>
+    <li>The file&apos;s location was changed or the file was deleted or
+      moved to another location.</li>
+  </ul>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Look for broken images in the page you are trying to publish. Broken
+      images will appear with this icon
+      <img src="images/broken.gif" width="20" height="20" alt="" /> in the
+      page. To correct the image&apos;s address, double-click the broken
+      image to display the Image Properties dialog box so you can enter the
+      correct address.</li>
+    <li>Remove the broken image from the page by selecting it (click once on
+      the image), and then pressing <kbd>Backspace</kbd> or <kbd>Delete</kbd>
+      on your keyboard.</li>
+    <li>If the image is unavailable because the server where the image resides
+      is inaccessible, try publishing the page at a later time.</li>
+    <li>If the missing file is a CSS file, you must first verify the correct
+      location of the CSS file. To fix the file&apos;s address in Composer,
+      click the HTML Source tab and edit the file&apos;s location in the HTML
+      source code. You should only edit the HTML source if you are familiar
+      with HTML tags.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="subdir_not_found"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt>The subdirectory <var>directory name</var> doesn&apos;t exist on this
+      site or the filename <var>filename</var> is already in use by another
+      subdirectory</tt>
+    <p>or</p>
+    <tt>The filename <var>filename</var> is already in use by another
+      subdirectory</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: You specified the name of a remote
+    subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing site. Composer can only
+    publish to a remote subdirectory that already exists at the publishing
+    location. Or, you specified a filename that is identical to the name of an
+    existing subdirectory at the publishing site.</p>
+
+  <p>For example, in the Publish Page dialog box, under the Publish tab:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>for <q>Site subdirectory for this page</q>, you may have typed the name
+      of a subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing location.</li>
+    <li>you checked <q>Include images and other files</q>, and then you typed
+      the name of a subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing
+      location.</li>
+    <li>one of the files you are attempting to publish has the same name as a
+      subdirectory at the publishing site.</li>
+  </ul>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Use a separate FTP program if you want to create, rename, or delete
+      subdirectories at the publishing site. Ask your service provider if they
+      recommend a particular FTP program. You can usually find information on
+      FTP programs in the Help or Support sections of your service
+      provider&apos;s website. FTP programs are also available from shareware
+      sites such as ZDNet Downloads.</li>
+    <li>Don&apos;t use subdirectory names that end with <q>.html</q> or
+      <q>.htm</q>. Only your Composer filenames should end with <q>.html</q>
+      or <q>.htm</q>.</li>
+    <li>Subdirectory names are case-sensitive, so be sure to enter a
+      subdirectory name exactly as it appears at the publishing location.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="server_not_found"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt>The server is not available. Check your connection and try again
+      later.</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: This error can have many causes. For
+    example:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Your publishing site settings may not be correct.</li>
+    <li>Your Internet connection may have been lost.</li>
+    <li>Your modem or other equipment that you use to connect to the Internet
+      might not be functioning correctly.</li>
+    <li>The web server that you are trying to publish to might be unavailable
+      due to a technical problem or to an unknown circumstance.</li>
+    <li>Your ISP or web hosting service may be experiencing technical
+      problems.</li>
+  </ul>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Verify that your publishing settings are correct and that you entered
+      them correctly. See
+      <a href="#verifying_your_publishing_settings">Verifying Your Publishing
+      Settings</a> for more information.</li>
+    <li>Make sure your Internet connection is working by attempting to view a
+      web page using the browser. For example, confirm that you can
+      successfully view the page <tt>http://www.mozilla.org</tt>.</li>
+    <li>If your Internet connection is not working, verify that all hardware,
+      telephone connections, modems, and network connections are functioning
+      properly.</li>
+    <li>Use the browser to try to view a page at the website you are
+      attempting to publish to. If you can successfully view other websites but
+      cannot view a page at the publishing site, your ISP or web hosting
+      service may be experiencing technical problems.</li>
+    <li>Try publishing again later. Your ISP, web hosting service, or the web
+      server may be experiencing temporary technical difficulties.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="no_permission"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt>You do not have permission to publish to this location.</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: You are attempting to publish to a
+    location that you are not authorized to use. You can only publish to sites
+    where you have been granted access by your ISP or web hosting service.</p>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Verify that you entered the correct user name and password in the
+      Publishing Site Settings dialog box, or in the Publish tab of the
+      Publish dialog box.</li>
+    <li>Contact your ISP to find out where you can publish your pages at their
+      site.</li>
+    <li>Find a web hosting service that you can use to publish your pages. In
+      the browser, search for <q>web hosting</q>.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="offline_error"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt>You are currently offline. Click the icon near the lower-right corner
+      of any window to go online.</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: You are attempting to publish, but
+    your &brandShortName; Internet connection is currently in the
+    <q>offline</q> state. Your Internet connection must be in the <q>online</q>
+    state (connected to the Internet) in order to publish your pages.</p>
+
+  <p>Verify that your Internet connection is currently offline by looking at
+    the online/offline icon in the lower right corner of any &brandShortName;
+    window. If you are currently offline, the icon appears as
+    <img src="images/offline.png" width="32" height="21" alt="" />.</p>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Click the online/offline icon to go online. In the online state, the
+      icon should look like this:
+      <img src="images/online.png" width="32" height="20" alt="" />.</li>
+    <li>Make sure your Internet connection is working by attempting to view a
+      web page using the browser. For example, confirm that you can
+      successfully view the page <tt>http://www.mozilla.org</tt>.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="no_disk_space"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt>There is not enough disk space available to save the file
+      <var>filename</var>.</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: The remote web server&apos;s hard
+    disk is full, or you may have exceeded the amount of disk space allocated
+    to you by your ISP or web hosting service.</p>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Use a separate FTP program to delete unnecessary files at your
+      publishing site. Ask your service provider if they recommend a
+      particular FTP program. You can usually find information on FTP programs
+      in the Help or Support sections of your service provider&apos;s website.
+      FTP programs are also available from shareware sites such as ZDNet
+      Downloads.</li>
+    <li>Find out from your ISP or web hosting service about increasing your
+      disk space allocation, or switch to a different service that can satisfy
+      your needs.</li>
+    <li>If the web server is located at your company or school, contact the
+      network administrator to find out if you can publish to a different
+      location that has more disk space, or if you can request that
+      additional disk space be allocated to your current publishing
+      location.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="name_too_long"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt>The filename or subdirectory name is too long.</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: The number of characters in the
+    filename or the subdirectory name is not supported by the web server
+    computer that you are trying to publish to.</p>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Limit the length of your filenames and subdirectory names to less than
+      32 characters. Some operating systems do not support names longer than 32
+      characters.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="publishing_settings">Publishing Settings</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes Composer&apos;s publishing settings. For
+  information on Composer&apos;s general and new page settings, see
+  <a href="#composer_preferences">Composer Preferences</a>.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#publish_page_publish">Publish Page - Publish</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#publish_page_settings">Publish Page - Settings</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#publish_settings">Publish Settings</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="publish_page_publish">Publish Page - Publish</h3>
+
+<p>The Publish Page - Publish tab lets you specify where you want
+  to publish a document. These settings apply to the current
+  document.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not already viewing the Publish Page - Publish tab,
+  follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Publish As. The Publish Page
+    dialog box appears.</li>
+  <li>Click the Publish tab.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Site Name</strong>: Lists all the publishing sites you&apos;ve
+    created, so you can choose the site that you want to publish to. To
+    create a new site, click New Site.</li>
+  <li><strong>Page Title</strong>: Specifies the document&apos;s page title as
+    it appears in the browser window&apos;s title bar when you view the page in
+    the browser. The document&apos;s page title also appears in your list of
+    bookmarks if you bookmark the page.</li>
+  <li><strong>Filename</strong>: Specifies the document&apos;s filename. Make
+    sure you include the .html or .htm extension in the filename.
+
+    <p><strong>Warning</strong>: If a file on the remote site you&apos;re
+      publishing to has the same filename as one you&apos;re uploading, the
+      newly uploaded file will replace the existing one. You will not be
+      asked to confirm the action.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Site subdirectory for this page</strong>: If you leave this
+    blank, Composer publishes the page to the main (root) publishing
+    directory at this site. If you want to publish the page to a remote
+    subdirectory that resides underneath the main publishing directory
+    at this site, enter the name of the subdirectory or choose it from
+    the list. Composer keeps track of the locations you type here, so
+    you can select from a list of remote locations you&apos;ve previously
+    used. Keep in mind that subdirectory names are case-sensitive.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: The site subdirectory you choose must
+      already exist at the remote server.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Include images and other files</strong>: If checked,
+    Composer publishes any images and other files referenced by this
+    page. You can choose to publish these files to the same location as
+    the page, or else you can choose to publish these files into a
+    remote subdirectory that exists underneath the main publishing
+    directory.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To create remote subdirectories or delete
+  published pages or images, you must use an FTP (File Transfer
+  Protocol) program. Ask your service provider if they recommend a
+  particular FTP program. You can usually find information on FTP
+  programs in the Help or Support sections of your service provider&apos;s
+  website. FTP programs are also available from shareware sites such
+  as ZDNet Downloads.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="publish_page_settings">Publish Page - Settings</h3>
+
+<p>The Publish Page - Settings tab lets you specify your login information for
+  the remote publishing site, as well as the publishing settings for the remote
+  site. These settings apply to the current document and any other files you
+  publish to this location.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not already viewing the Publish Page - Settings tab, follow
+  these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Publish As. The Publish Page dialog box
+    appears.</li>
+  <li>Click the Settings tab.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Site Name</strong>: Specifies the nickname you want to use for
+    this publishing site. Enter a short name that will help you identify this
+    publishing site.</li>
+  <li><strong>Publishing address</strong>: Specifies the complete URL provided
+    to you by your ISP or system administrator. This URL should begin with
+    either <tt>ftp://</tt> or <tt>http://</tt>. This name is often referred to
+    as the <q>host name</q> or the <q>host server name</q>.
+
+    <p>The publishing address specifies the location where documents are
+      published (uploaded) at this site. If you are not sure what to enter,
+      ask your ISP or system administrator.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>HTTP address of your home page</strong>: Specifies the complete
+    address of your publishing home directory. This is the web address of the
+    home page at your website. Do not include a filename or subdirectory as
+    part of the URL.
+
+    <p>This URL must always begin with <tt>http://</tt>. In some cases, this
+      URL is the same as the publishing address. If you are not sure what to
+      enter, ask your ISP or system administrator, or else leave it blank.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>User name</strong>: Specifies the user name you use to log into
+    your ISP or network.</li>
+  <li><strong>Password</strong>: Specifies the password for your user
+    name.</li>
+  <li><strong>Save Password</strong>: Select this to encrypt and save your
+    password securely using Password Manager so that you don&apos;t have to
+    enter it each time you publish pages at this site.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="publish_settings">Publish Settings</h3>
+
+<p>The Publish Settings dialog box lets you create, edit, and
+  delete publishing site settings, and also lets you set the default
+  publishing site.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not already viewing the Publish Settings dialog box,
+  follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings.
+    Composer displays the Publish Settings dialog box.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>New Site</strong>: Lets you specify settings for a new publishing
+    site. Composer adds the name of the new publishing site to the list
+    of available publishing sites.</li>
+  <li><strong>Set as Default</strong>: Sets the selected publishing site as the
+    default publishing site. Typically, the default publishing site is
+    the remote location that you most often use for publishing
+    documents. All documents you create or edit will be published to
+    the default publishing site, unless you specifically choose an
+    alternate site in the Publish Page dialog box.
+
+    <p>To publish a document to a different remote location, open the
+      File menu and choose Publish As to choose a different publishing
+      destination.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Remove Site</strong>: Removes the selected site and its settings
+    from Composer.</li>
+  <li><strong>Site Name</strong>: Specifies the name by which you want to refer
+    to this publishing site.</li>
+  <li><strong>Publishing address</strong>: Specifies the complete URL provided
+    to you by your ISP or system administrator. This URL should begin
+    with either <tt>ftp://</tt> or <tt>http://</tt>.
+
+    <p>The publishing address specifies the location where documents
+      are published (uploaded) at this site. If you are not sure what to
+      enter, ask your ISP or system administrator.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>HTTP address of your homepage</strong>: Specifies the HTTP
+    address of your publishing home directory. Do not include a
+    filename or subdirectory as part of the URL.
+
+    <p>This URL must always begin with <tt>http://</tt>. In some cases,
+      this URL is the same as the publishing address. If you are not sure
+      what to enter, ask your ISP or system administrator, or else leave
+      it blank.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>User name</strong>: Specifies the user name you use to log in to
+    your ISP or network.</li>
+  <li><strong>Password</strong>: Specifies the password for your user
+    name.</li>
+  <li><strong>Save Password</strong>: Select this to save your
+    password securely using Password Manager so you don&apos;t have to enter
+    it each time you publish pages at this site.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h1 id="composer_preferences">Composer Preferences</h1>
+
+<p>This section describes the settings in the Composer preferences panel. If
+  you are not currently viewing the panel, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Double-click the Composer category to expand the list.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>For information on Composer&apos;s publishing settings, see
+  <a href="#publishing_settings">Publishing Settings</a>.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#composer">Composer</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#new_page_settings">New Page Settings</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="composer">Composer Preferences - Composer</h2>
+
+<p>Composer preferences allow you to specify settings for saving files and for
+  table editing. These settings apply to every document you create.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not already viewing the Composer preferences, follow these
+  steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Click the Composer category.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Maximum number of pages listed</strong>: Specify the maximum
+    number of pages that are listed under Recent Pages in the File menu.</li>
+  <li><strong>Preserve original source formatting</strong>: Select this if you
+    want to preserve the original white space (extra lines, tabs, etc.) in the
+    HTML source code. Deselect this if you prefer Composer to indent and add
+    linebreaks to the code in order to make it more readable. <em>This
+    preference does not affect how your pages appear in a browser
+    window.</em></li>
+  <li><strong>Save images and other associated files when saving
+    pages</strong>: If checked, all images, JavaScript (JS), Cascading Style
+    Sheet (CSS), and other associated files are saved in the same location as
+    the document when the document is saved for the first time or when the
+    document is saved to a new location. If unchecked, only the HTML file is
+    saved.
+
+    <p>For example, when editing a remote page, this setting ensures that all
+      related files associated with the remote page will be saved locally when
+      you save the page to your hard disk.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Always show Publish dialog when publishing pages</strong>: If
+    checked, Composer always displays the Publish Page dialog box when you
+    click the Publish button or choose Publish from the File menu. If not
+    checked, Composer only displays the Publish Page dialog box if it needs
+    more information in order to publish the page.</li>
+  <li><strong>Maintain table layout when inserting or deleting cells</strong>:
+    Select this if you want Composer to always preserve the table&apos;s
+    layout (that is, keep it in a rectangular shape) by adding cells where
+    needed. If you deselect this option, when you delete one or more cells,
+    Composer removes the cell border as well, which can result in a table with
+    empty spaces, or an outline that appears irregular due to an uneven number
+    of cells.</li>
+  <li><strong>Use CSS styles instead of HTML elements and attributes</strong>:
+    Enables the use of Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) formatting in your Composer
+    documents. With this preference enabled, Composer generates HTML 4.01
+    formatting with CSS inline styles for elements.
+
+    <p>If this preference is not enabled, Composer generates HTML 4.01
+      formatting, but does not use CSS styles.</p>
+
+    <p>Compared to HTML, HTML with CSS formatting is more portable, more
+      maintainable, and more compatible when viewed with different browsers.
+      If you enable this preference and then edit a document created without
+      CSS, Composer replaces the edited elements with CSS styles.</p>
+
+    <p>If you enable CSS styles, you can choose a text highlight color for
+      selected text using the text highlight color button on the Format
+      toolbar. You can also choose a color background for any element on the
+      page. (These features are not available if this preference is not
+      enabled.)</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong><kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> in a
+     paragraph always creates a new paragraph</strong>: If selected, a new
+     paragraph will be added everytime you press the <kbd class="mac">Return
+     </kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> key inside a paragraph. If
+     deselected, a linebreak will be added when you press the <kbd
+     class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> key.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#composer_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="new_page_settings">Composer Preferences - New Page Settings</h2>
+
+<p>New page preferences allow you to specify settings for colors and
+  background images that apply to every document you create.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not already viewing the New Page Settings, follow these
+  steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Double-click the Composer category and click New Page Settings.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Author</strong>: Enter your name. This will add your name to the
+    HTML source code for each new page you create.</li>
+  <li><strong>Reader&apos;s default colors</strong>: Select this if you always
+    want your pages to use the color settings from the viewer&apos;s browser
+    for text and link elements.</li>
+  <li><strong>Use custom colors</strong>: Select this if you always want to
+    specify the colors that are applied to text and link elements. Then for
+    each element, select a color by clicking the color button next to each
+    element.</li>
+  <li><strong>Background image</strong>: Type the location and name of an image
+    file, or click Choose File to locate the image file on your hard disk or
+    network. 
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Background images are tiled and override
+      background color.</p>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To change the author name for an individual page: Open the Format menu and
+  choose Page Title and Properties.</p>
+
+<p>To change the page colors and background image for an individual page: Open
+  the Format menu and choose Page Colors and Background.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#composer_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+</body>
+</html>
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml
@@ -0,0 +1,608 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>&brandShortName; Advanced Preferences Help</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<h1 id="advanced_preferences">Advanced Preferences</h1>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Advanced preferences panel. If you are
+  not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Click the Advanced category.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#advanced">Advanced</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#scripts_and_plugins">Scripts &amp; Plugins</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#keyboard_navigation">Keyboard Navigation</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#fayt">Find As You Type</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#cache">Cache</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#proxies">Proxies</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#http_networking">HTTP Networking</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#software_installation">Software Installation</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#mouse_wheel">Mouse Wheel</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#dom_inspector">DOM Inspector</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="advanced">Advanced Preferences - Advanced</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the main Advanced preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Click the Advanced category.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The main Advanced preferences panel allows you to enable or disable
+  Java:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Enable Java</strong>: Select this to allow &brandShortName; to
+    interpret pages containing Java. Java is used on some Web page to
+    incorporate interactive and multimedia content.</li>
+  <li class="unix"><strong>Use Preferences from System</strong>: Select this to
+    use the already set system preferences, overriding &brandShortName;&apos;
+    ones.
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="scripts_and_plugins">Advanced Preferences - Scripts &amp;
+  Plugins</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Scripts &amp; Plugins preferences
+  panel. If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Scripts &amp; Plugins. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Scripts &amp; Plugins preferences panel allows you to control how
+  JavaScript and plugins are used:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Enable JavaScript for</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Browser</strong>: Select this to turn on JavaScript for web
+        pages opened in the browser.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Allow scripts to</strong>: Select these checkboxes to control
+    how JavaScript can be used:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Move or resize existing windows</strong>: Allows open windows
+        to be resized or moved.</li>
+      <li><strong>Raise or lower windows</strong>: Allows windows to be placed
+        under or on top of other windows.</li>
+      <li><strong>Hide the status bar</strong>: Allows the status bar to be
+        hidden.</li>
+      <li><strong>Change status bar text</strong>: Allows status bar text to be
+        changed, such as in scrolling text in the status bar.</li>
+      <li><strong>Change images</strong>: Allows images to be changed or
+        animated, such as in image rollovers (images that change when the mouse
+        cursor is placed over them).</li>
+      <li><strong>Disable or replace context menus</strong>: Allows right-click
+        menus<span class="mac"> or, if you&apos;re using a one-button mouse,
+        <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-click menus</span> to be replaced or disabled by
+        webpages.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Enable Plugins for</strong>: Check this checkbox to control how
+    plugins are used:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Mail &amp; Newsgroups</strong>: Allows plugins to be used in
+        Mail &amp; Newsgroups.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>When additional plugins are required</strong>: Check this
+    checkbox if you want to be informed whenever a website requires additional
+    plugins:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Display a notification bar at the top of the content
+        area</strong>: When a website requires a plugin which is not installed,
+        a notification bar will be displayed above the website content area.
+        From the bar you will be able to download and install the missing
+        plugin.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>For more information about plugins, see
+  <a href="nav_help.xhtml#plugins_and_downloads">Plugins and Downloads</a>.
+</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="keyboard_navigation">Advanced Preferences - Keyboard Navigation</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Keyboard Navigation preferences
+  panel. If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Keyboard Navigation. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Keyboard Navigation preferences panel allows you to control how you use
+  the keyboard to navigate in web pages:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li class="noMac"><strong>Tab Key Navigation</strong>: Select which elements
+    should be taken into account when using the Tab key on a page:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Links</strong>: If checked, pressing <kbd>Tab</kbd> or
+        <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd>Tab</kbd> moves between links.</li>
+      <li><strong>Buttons, radio buttons, checkboxes, and selection
+        lists</strong>: If checked, pressing <kbd>Tab</kbd> or
+        <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd>Tab</kbd> moves between buttons, radio buttons,
+        check boxes, and selection lists.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Browse With Caret</strong>: Select if and how <a
+    href="glossary.xhtml#caret_browsing">caret browsing</a> should be used:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Use caret browsing</strong>: If checked, caret browsing will
+        be enabled by default when you load a web page.</li>
+      <li><strong>Use the F7 shortcut to toggle caret browsing</strong>: If
+        checked, the F7 shortcut will toggle caret browsing on or off. Otherwise
+        &brandShortName; will not use the shortcut and the below option will
+        have no effect.</li>
+      <li><strong>Warn me before turning on caret browsing</strong>: If checked,
+        &brandShortName; will issue a warning dialog if the caret browsing mode
+        is about to be entered, allowing you to choose whether to proceed or
+        not. (There is no warning when leaving caret browsing mode.)</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="fayt">Advanced Preferences - Find As You Type</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Find As You Type references
+  panel. If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Find As You Type. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Find As You Type preferences panel allows you to control how you use
+  the keyboard to search for text in web pages:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Find automatically when typing within a web page</strong>: If
+    checked, typing text in a web page automatically activates Find As You Type
+    and locates the text you typed (if it exists in the page). Choose whether
+    you want typing to find any text in the page or links only. If unchecked,
+    you must choose Find Links As You Type or Find Text As You Type from the
+    Edit menu before typing the text you want to find.</li>
+  <li><strong>Play a sound when typed text isn&apos;t found</strong>: If
+    checked, Find As You Type plays a sound when the typed text isn&apos;t
+    found in the web page.</li>
+  <li><strong>Clear the current search after a few seconds of
+    inactivity</strong>: If checked, the search will be cancelled after a few
+    seconds of keyboard inactivity.</li>
+  <li><strong>Show the find toolbar during find as you type</strong>: If
+    checked, the find toolbar will open when Find As You Type is activated and
+    what you type will be entered into the toolbar search field. If unchecked,
+    the find toolbar will not be opened and the search string will be displayed
+    in the status bar. Note that international text entry will not work in this
+    mode.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="cache">Advanced Preferences - Cache</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Cache preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are
+    visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Cache preferences panel allows you to adjust the &brandShortName; memory
+  and disk cache:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Let &brandShortName; manage the size of my cache</strong>: Select
+    this to let &brandShortName; apply a heuristic based on the space available
+    on your hard disk in order to determine your cache size. (This is the
+    default.)</li>
+  <li><strong>Use up to [__] MB of disk space for the cache</strong>: Type in
+    the amount of disk cache you want to allocate for &brandShortName;. The disk
+    cache is saved to your hard disk (drive) and can be used again, even if you
+    have restarted your computer. (The default is 1024 MB. This preference is
+    ignored if the above checkbox is selected.)</li>
+  <li><strong>Clear Cache</strong>: Click this to clear the disk cache.</li>
+  <li><strong>Cache Folder Location</strong>: Shows the current location of the
+    disk cache folder 
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Choose Folder</strong>: Click this to choose a folder
+        location for the disk cache.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Compare the page in the cache to the page on the
+    network</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Every time I view the page</strong>: Select this if you want
+        &brandShortName; to compare a web page to the cache every time you view
+        it.</li>
+      <li><strong>When the page is out of date</strong>: Select this if you
+        want &brandShortName; to compare a web page to the cache when the page
+        is determined by the server to have expired.</li>
+      <li><strong>Once per session</strong>: Select this if you want
+        &brandShortName; to compare a web page to the cache once for each time
+        you start &brandShortName;.</li>
+      <li><strong>Never</strong>: Select this if you do not want
+        &brandShortName; to compare cached information to the network.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Prefetch web pages when idle, so that links in web pages
+    designed for prefetching can load more quickly</strong>: Select this to
+    decrease the time it takes to load web pages when you click a link in a web
+    page that uses prefetching. For more information about Link Prefetching, see
+    the online
+    <a href="http://www.mozilla.org/projects/netlib/Link_Prefetching_FAQ.html">Link
+    Prefetching FAQ</a>.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="proxies">Advanced Preferences - Proxies</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Proxies preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Proxies. (If no subcategories are
+    visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Proxies preferences panel allows you to set up &brandShortName; to use a
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#proxy">proxy</a>:</p>
+
+<p><strong>Before you start</strong>: Ask your network administrator if you
+  have a proxy configuration file or for the names and port numbers of the
+  proxy.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Direct connection to the Internet</strong>: Choose this if you
+    don&apos;t want to use a proxy.</li>
+  <li><strong>Automatically discover the proxy configuration</strong>: Choose
+    this if you want &brandShortName; to automatically detect and configure the
+    proxy settings, using the <a href="glossary.xhtml#wpad">WPAD protocol</a>.</li>
+  <li><strong>Automatic proxy configuration URL</strong>: Choose this if you
+    have a proxy configuration file or URL, then enter the configuration
+    URL.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Reload</strong>: Click this to reload the configuration file.
+
+        <p>For more information about Automatic Proxy Configuration, see the
+          online
+          <a href="http://www.mozilla.org/catalog/end-user/customizing/enduserPAC.html">End
+          User Guide to Proxy AutoConfiguration</a>.</p>
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Manual proxy configuration</strong>: Choose this if you
+    don&apos;t have a proxy location (URL), or the automatic proxy discovery
+    was unable to setup the proxy settings correctly.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Proxy</strong>: Enter the name or numeric IP address of
+        the proxy server.</li>
+      <li><strong>Port</strong>: Enter the port number in the Port field. Click
+        on <q>Advanced</q> to set
+        <a href="#advanced_proxy_preferences">Advanced Proxy Preferences</a></li>
+      <li><strong>No Proxy for</strong>: Type the domains and/or IP addresses
+        that you do not want to use a proxy for. Separate each entry with a
+        comma. (Example: <kbd>.mozilla.org, .net.nz, 192.168.1.0/24</kbd>.)
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="advanced_proxy_preferences">Advanced Proxy Preferences</h3>
+
+<p>If you want to use different proxies for different protocols or need to use
+  a SOCKS proxy:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>HTTP Proxy</strong>, <strong>SSL Proxy</strong>,
+    <strong>FTP Proxy</strong>: Enter the name or numeric IP address 
+    of the proxy server. Type the port in the Port fields.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: If you&apos;re using the same settings
+      for all types of proxies, click on <q>Use HTTP Proxy settings
+      for all protocols</q>.</p>
+
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>SOCKS Proxy</strong>: Enter the name or numeric IP address
+    of the proxy server. Enter the port number in the Port field. 
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>SOCKS v4, SOCKS v5</strong>: When entering a SOCKS Proxy,
+        select <q>SOCKS v4</q> or <q>SOCKS v5</q>, depending on what version
+        of <a href="glossary.xhtml#socks">SOCKS</a> is used for the proxy.</li>
+      <li><strong>Use for resolving hostnames</strong>: Select this to
+        use the SOCKS Proxy for resolving hostnames. This is
+        recommended for SOCKS v5 proxies.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="http_networking">Advanced Preferences - HTTP Networking</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the HTTP Networking preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click HTTP Networking. (If no subcategories
+    are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The HTTP Networking preferences panel is used to configure HTTP-based
+  networking:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Direct Connection Options, Proxy Connection Options</strong>:
+    Choose the HTTP version and options for direct and proxy connections.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Use HTTP 1.0</strong>: Choose this to use the original
+        version of HTTP, standardized in 1996.</li>
+      <li><strong>Use HTTP 1.1</strong>: Choose this to use the new version of
+        HTTP, which offers performance enhancements, including more efficient
+        use of HTTP connections, better support for client-side caching,
+        multiple HTTP requests (pipelining), and more refined control over
+        cache expiration and replacement policies.</li>
+      <li><strong>Enable Keep-Alive</strong>: Select this to keep a connection
+        open to make additional HTTP requests, increasing speed.</li>
+      <li><strong>Enable Pipelining</strong>: Select this to
+        enable pipelining, which allows for more than one HTTP request to be
+        sent to the server at once, reducing delays loading web pages.
+
+        <p><strong>Note</strong>: Pipelining is only available with 
+          HTTP 1.1.</p></li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>User Agent String</strong>:
+    The identifier sent by &brandShortName; to all websites is used for
+    statistics about website usage but also sometimes to expose certain features
+    only to known browsers (a practice known as "sniffing").
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Advertise Firefox compatibility</strong>: If this is enabled,
+        &brandShortName; will identify itself as both &brandShortName; and also
+        compatible with Firefox. This allows websites that check for certain
+        browsers rather than certain functionality to work with &brandShortName;.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="software_installation">Advanced Preferences - Software
+  Installation</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Software Installation preferences
+  panel. If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Software Installation. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Software Installation preferences panel is used to enable add-on
+  installation and updates. The Add-on Manager allows you to view and manage
+  all your installed extensions and themes.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Add-ons</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Allow websites to install add-ons and updates</strong>:
+        Select this if you want to allow websites to install add-ons and
+        updates to be used with &brandShortName;. You will be prompted before
+        each installation.
+        <ul>
+          <li><strong>Allowed Websites</strong>: Click this link to open the
+            Data Manager tab, where you can view and edit the list of websites
+            that you want to allow to install software</li>
+          <li><strong>Automatically check for updates</strong>:Select this to
+            be notified when a new version of one of your installed add-ons is
+            available. Choose whether you want &brandShortName; to do a
+            <strong>daily</strong> or a <strong>weekly</strong> check for new
+            versions.</li>
+          <li><strong>Automatically download and install the update</strong>:
+            Select this if you want &brandShortName; to automatically download
+            and install updates for you when they become available. The download
+            will happen in the background, with low priority. After the download
+            has finished the update to the add-on will be installed
+            automatically the next time you start &brandShortName;.</li>
+        </ul>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Personalize Add-on recommendations</strong>: Select this to
+        be offered suggestions for add-ons in the &quot;Get Add-ons&quot; tab
+        of the manager:
+        <ul>
+          <li>Note that this function involves sending a list of your
+            currently installed add-ons to the add-on web site.</li>
+          <li>Disabling this option will also suppress contacting the add-on
+            site periodically for any new information about installed add-ons,
+            but won't affect automated updates.</li>
+        </ul>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Manage Add-ons</strong>: Click this link to open the Add-on
+        Manager in a new browser tab.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>&brandShortName;</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Automatically check for updates</strong>:Select this to be
+        notified when a new version of &brandShortName; is available. Choose
+        whether you want &brandShortName; to do a <strong>daily</strong> or
+        a <strong>weekly</strong> check for new versions.
+        <ul>
+          <li><strong>Automatically download and install the update</strong>:
+            Select this if you want &brandShortName; to automatically download
+            and install updates for you when they become available. The download
+            will happen in the background, with low priority. After the download
+            has finished the update to &brandShortName; will be installed
+            automatically the next time you start it.</li>
+          <li><strong>Warn me if this will disable any of my add-ons</strong>:
+            Select this to be notified if an automatic update will disable any
+            of your installed add-ons. In that case you will be shown a list
+            of incompatible add-ons and you can choose whether you want to
+            download and install the update or not.</li>
+        </ul>
+        <p><strong>Note</strong>: You can use Check for Updates from the
+          <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span><span class="noMac">Help</span>
+          menu to manually initiate the search for a &brandShortName; update.
+          <span class="noMac">The label of the menu item will change when an
+          update is being downloaded or ready to be applied.</span></p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Show Update History…</strong>: Click this to open the Update
+        History dialog box which shows a list of &brandShortName; updates that
+        have been installed, including the update type (e.g. Security Update),
+        time of installation and installation status. The Details link next to
+        each update takes you to a web page that contains further information
+        regarding the update.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="mouse_wheel">Advanced Preferences - Mouse Wheel</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Mouse Wheel preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Mouse Wheel. (If no subcategories
+    are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Mouse Wheel preferences panel allows you to control how the mouse wheel
+  on your mouse (in between your mouse buttons) is used in &brandShortName;.
+  Modern mice may have two wheels or a button that can be used to switch the
+  scroll direction of the wheel. The behaviour for the vertical wheel function
+  is set in the upper panel <strong>Vertical scrolling</strong> while the 
+  horizontal mode is controlled by the lower panel <strong>Horizontal
+  scrolling</strong>.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Select <q>No modifier key</q> or select a key that you want to use
+    along with the mouse wheel. Use the checkboxes below to configure mouse
+    wheel behavior:
+    
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Scroll the document by</strong>: Choose this to scroll the
+        document by the number of lines (or characters for horizontal movement)
+        typed in the field.
+        <ul>
+          <li><strong>Use system default</strong>: Choose this to use your
+            system&apos;s default setting&mdash;the number of lines (characters)
+            you may have previously entered will be overridden. Read your
+            system&apos;s documentation to find out where to change the
+            system default mouse wheel/scroll settings.</li>
+        </ul>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Scroll a page up (left) or a page down (right)</strong>:
+        Choose this to scroll up or down one page at a time. This setting allows
+        faster, but less accurate scrolling through a page with your mouse
+        wheel.</li>
+      <li><strong>Move back and forward in the browsing history</strong>:
+        Choose this to use the mouse wheel to navigate back or forward to
+        previous pages you&apos;ve visited.</li>
+      <li><strong>Make the text larger or smaller</strong>: Choose this to use
+        the mouse wheel to increase or decrease the size of text on a web page.
+        This setting can help you better read a page, or make text fit on the
+        screen.</li>
+    </ul>
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Each modifier key can be assigned to a different
+      function.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>If your mouse does not have a mode for horizontal scrolling, any setting
+    in the lower panel <strong>Horizontal scrolling</strong> will be ignored.
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="dom_inspector">Advanced Preferences - DOM Inspector</h2>
+
+<p>DOM Inspector is an optional <a href="developer_tools.xhtml">Web development
+  component</a>. This section describes how to use its preferences panel.
+  If you are not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click DOM Inspector. (If no subcategories are
+    visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>When you select an element, DOM Inspector can automatically highlight it by
+  flashing it or its border:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Blink Selected Element</strong>: Check this option to enable the
+    highlighting of an element that you select. By default, a flashing border
+    will appear around the element.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Border Color</strong>: Select the color of the border around
+        the element.</li>
+      <li><strong>Border Width</strong>: Enter the width of the border around
+        the element.</li>
+      <li><strong>Blink Duration</strong>: Enter the length of time
+      (in milliseconds) for which you want the flashing to occur.</li>
+      <li><strong>Blink Speed</strong>: Enter the time interval
+        (in milliseconds) between the flashes.</li>
+      <li><strong>Invert Color</strong>: Check this option to paint the
+        selected element with the inverted border color. This will cause the
+        whole element&mdash;including its border&mdash;to flash.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+</body>
+</html>
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml
@@ -0,0 +1,253 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd" [
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>&brandShortName; Appearance Preferences Help</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<h1 id="appearance_preferences">Appearance Preferences</h1>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Appearance preference panel. If you
+  are not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Double-click Appearance to expand the list, then click the name for the
+    preferences you want to view.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section: 
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#appearance">Appearance</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#content">Content</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#fonts">Fonts</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#colors">Colors</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="appearance">Appearance Preferences - Appearance</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Appearance preferences panels. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing one of these panels, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Click the Appearance category.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Appearance preferences panel allows you to set &brandShortName; startup
+  options and customize the user interface:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>When &brandShortName; starts up, open</strong>: Select the
+    components you want to use when you start up &brandShortName;</li>
+  <li>Show toolbars as: 
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Pictures and text</strong>: Select this to see text
+        underneath each of the toolbar buttons.</li>
+      <li><strong>Pictures only</strong>: Select this to show the toolbar
+        buttons only.</li>
+      <li><strong>Text only</strong>: Select this to show text buttons
+        only.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Show Tooltips</strong>: Select this if you want to have 
+    <a href="glossary.xhtml#tooltip">tooltips</a> appear when the cursor
+    is placed over parts of the &brandShortName; user interface and some
+    websites.</li>
+  <li><strong>User Interface Language</strong>: This setting allows you to
+    change the language used in the user interface of &brandShortName;.
+    Additional languages can be installed from the &brandShortName; home page.
+    <strong>Note</strong>: You must restart &brandShortName; for a new language
+    setting to take effect.
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#appearance_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="content">Appearance Preferences - Content</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Content preferences panel.
+  If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Appearance category, click Content. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Appearance to expand the
+    list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Content preferences panel allows you to change settings that influence
+  how website and message content appears in &brandShortName;.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Website Icons:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Show website icons</strong>: Select this if you want see
+        site-specific icons, if available, in place of the bookmark icon
+        <img src="chrome://communicator/skin/bookmarks/bookmark-item.png"
+        alt="Bookmark item icon"/>. Website icons are shown to the left of the
+        Location Bar and Browser tabs.</li>
+      <li><strong>Aggressively look for website icons when the page does not
+        define one</strong>: If the page itself does not define a website
+        icon, turning on this setting makes &brandShortName; look for a
+        &quot;favicon&quot; on the server and use that instead.</li>
+      <li>Display website icons in bookmarks menu and toolbar:
+        <ul>
+          <li><strong>Never show icons for bookmarks</strong>: Select this if
+            you only want to see the default icons but not the website&apos;s
+            own icon in the bookmarks menu or the personal toolbar.</li>
+          <li><strong>Only when website was loaded recently</strong>: Select
+            this to show the website&apos;s own icon only if the website has
+            been recently loaded and the icon is currently in the
+            browser&apos;s cache.</li>
+          <li><strong>Always load website icons for bookmarks</strong>: Select
+            this to always load website icons to be displayed in the bookmarks
+            menu or personal toolbar, even if it&apos;s not in the cache.</li>
+        </ul>
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Use smooth scrolling</strong>: Select this to enable smooth
+    scrolling. Pressing the Page Down key when this is enabled
+    will&mdash;instead of an immediate jump&mdash;smoothly scroll the content
+    down to the next page.</li>
+  <li><strong>Use hardware acceleration when available</strong>: Select this to
+    let &brandShortName; use hardware acceleration (if available) to render web
+    sites. If you experience problems with the visual presentation of web
+    content, disabling hardware acceleration may solve the issue.</li>
+  <li><strong>Resize large images to fit in the browser window</strong>: Select
+    this if you want &brandShortName; to automatically shrink large stand-alone
+    images so they will fit in the browser window. Clicking on the resized
+    image will make it appear at full size.</li>
+  <li><strong>Zoom only text instead of full pages</strong>: Select this if you
+    want &brandShortName; to only resize text of websites when using the
+    &quot;Zoom&quot; function. If this is not selected, the whole page,
+    including images, will be zoomed.</li>
+  <li><strong>Warn me when web sites try to redirect or reload the
+    page</strong>: Select this to let &brandShortName; block automatic meta
+    redirection (HTTP-EQUIV=refresh) requests by default. When a redirect is
+    supposed to be executed, a notification bar is shown instead which allows
+    you to permit the redirect on a case-by-case basis.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: See the separate preferences panels for colors, fonts
+  and languages to further customize content appearance and the Privacy &amp;
+  Security section for privacy-related settings that also might influence how
+  content appears to you.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#appearance_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="fonts">Appearance Preferences - Fonts</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Fonts preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Appearance category, click Fonts. (If no subcategories are
+    visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Fonts preferences panel allows you to set page font type and size.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Some font styles may not be selectable because the
+  selected language does not have fonts available for that style.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Fonts for</strong>: Choose a language group/script. For instance,
+    to set default fonts for West European languages/script (Latin), choose
+    <q>Western.</q> For Unicode or a language/script not yet in the list, choose
+    <q>Other Languages.</q> For more information, including <q>User Defined</q>,
+    see <a href="nav_help.xhtml#selecting_character_encodings_and_fonts">Selecting
+    Character Encodings and Fonts</a>.<br/>
+    All settings below, except for the checkbox, are stored per language group;
+    each can have its own set of font definitions.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Proportional</strong>: Select whether proportional text
+        should be serif (like Times Roman) or sans-serif (like Arial). You can
+        also specify what font size you want for proportional text.
+        Proportional text is variable in width, so characters and letters vary
+        in width.</li>
+      <li><strong>Serif</strong>: Select a serif font you want to use for
+        web pages.</li>
+      <li><strong>Sans-serif</strong>: Select a sans-serif font you want to use
+        for web pages.</li>
+      <li><strong>Cursive</strong>: Select a cursive font you want to use for
+        web pages.</li>
+      <li><strong>Fantasy</strong>: Select a fantasy font you want to use for
+        web pages.</li>
+      <li><strong>Monospace</strong>: Select a monospace font (like Courier)
+        and size you want to use for web pages. Monospace text is fixed in
+        width, so each character or letter takes the same amount of space.</li>
+      <li><strong>Minimum font size</strong>: Select the smallest font size you
+        want to be shown on web pages.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Allow documents to use other fonts</strong>: Select
+    this checkbox to keep a web page&apos;s font and size settings instead of
+    your own preferences.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#appearance_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="colors">Appearance Preferences - Colors</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Colors preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Appearance category, click Colors. (If no subcategories are
+    visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Colors preferences panel allows you to set the background and text
+  colors on web pages:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Text and Background</strong>: Click the colored blocks to select
+    a color for displaying text and backgrounds on web pages.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Use system colors</strong>: Select this to use your system
+        color settings.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Link Colors</strong>: Click the colored blocks to select a color
+    for displaying unvisited, active, and visited links on web pages.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Underline links</strong>: Select this to display underlined
+        links on web pages.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>When a web page provides its own colors and
+    backgrounds</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Always use the colors and background specified by the web
+        page</strong>: Allows the web page to choose displayed colors and
+        backgrounds.</li>
+      <li><strong>Use my chosen colors, ignoring the colors and background
+        image specified</strong>: Allow you to choose displayed colors,
+        ignoring the web page colors and background image.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#appearance_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+</body>
+</html>
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml
@@ -0,0 +1,674 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>&brandShortName; Browser Preferences Help</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<h1 id="navigator_preferences">Browser Preferences</h1>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Browser preference panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Choose Browser.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#navigator">Browser</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#history">History</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#languages">Languages</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#helper_applications">Helper Applications</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#location_bar">Location Bar</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#internet_search">Internet Search</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#tabbed_browsing">Tabbed Browsing</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#link_behavior">Link Behavior</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#downloads">Downloads</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="navigator">Browser Preferences - Browser</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the main browser preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Click the Browser category.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Browser preferences panel allows you to customize certain aspects of
+  the browser.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Display on</strong>: Use the drop-down list in combination with
+    the checkboxes to control what will be displayed at startup or when you
+    open a new window or tab:
+    <ol>
+      <li>
+        <ul>
+          <li>Select <strong>Browser Startup</strong> to set what the browser
+            will display at startup.</li>
+          <li>Select <strong>New Window</strong> to set what will be displayed
+            when opening a new browser window.</li>
+          <li>Select <strong>New Tab</strong> to set what will be displayed
+            when opening a new tab.</li>
+        </ul>
+      </li>
+      <li>Select one of the following checkboxes:
+        <ul>
+          <li><strong>Blank page</strong>: Causes the browser to display a blank
+            page.</li>
+          <li><strong>Home page</strong>: Causes the browser to load your home
+            page (specified below).</li>
+          <li><strong>Last page visited</strong>: Causes the browser to load the
+            page you were viewing right before you last exited
+            &brandShortName;.</li>
+          <li><strong>Restore Previous Session</strong>: Causes the browser to
+            restore the windows and tabs you were viewing right before you last
+            exited &brandShortName;, including form data and browsing
+            history. This option is only available in connection with
+            <strong>Display on Browser Startup</strong>.</li>
+        </ul>
+      </li>
+    </ol>
+  </li>
+  <li class="win"><strong>Default Browser</strong>: Allows you to set
+    &brandShortName; as the default browser or shows you that it is.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Set Default Browser</strong>: Unless it is greyed out, click
+        this to set &brandShortName; as your default browser.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Home Page</strong>: In the field, type the web page you want as
+    your home page or do one of the following:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Use Current Page</strong>: Click this to use the web page
+        currently displayed in the browser as your home page.</li>
+      <li><strong>Use Current Group</strong>: If you have two or more browser
+        tabs open, click this to set them as your Home Page Group (a group of
+        tabs that are opened as your home page). After clicking this button,
+        the message <q>Home Page Group is Set</q> appears in the location
+        field.
+
+        <p><strong>Caution</strong>: If you edit the field after clicking Use
+          Current Group, your Home Page Group will be lost.</p>
+
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Restore Default</strong>: Click this to revert to the
+        default home page.</li>
+      <li><strong>Choose File</strong>: Click this to locate a file on disk
+        that you want to load as your home page.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="history">Browser Preferences - History</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the History preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span>menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Browser category, click History. (If no subcategories are
+    visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The History preferences panel allows you to configure the history settings
+  for the browser.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Browsing History</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Clear History</strong>: Click this to delete the list of
+        websites visited.</li>
+      <li><strong>Remember visited pages</strong>: Select this to make
+        &brandShortName; remember pages you visit within the browsing history.
+        For example, you need that to be able to search for pages you have
+        already visited from the location bar or history window.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Location Bar History</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Clear Location Bar</strong>: Click this to clear the list of
+        websites in the Location bar menu.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Form and Search History</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Enable form and search history</strong>: Select this to let
+        &brandShortName; keep a history of the forms you fill in and the
+        searches you do.</li>
+      <li><strong>Remember form and search history for up to [__] days</strong>:
+        Type the maximum number of days you want &brandShortName; to keep track
+        of forms you fill in and searches you do. For example, if you set this
+        number to 180 days, forms and searches 180 days old or less will be
+        kept.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>For more information about history in &brandShortName;, see
+  <a href="nav_help.xhtml#retracing_your_steps">Retracing Your Steps</a>.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="languages">Browser Preferences - Languages</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Languages preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Browser category, click Languages. (If no subcategories are
+    visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Languages preferences panel allows you to choose the languages and
+  character encoding for displaying web pages and choose if and how your typing
+  is spell checked:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Languages for Web Pages</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Move Up / Move Down</strong>: Click one of these buttons to
+        move a selected language up or down, which sets the order of preference
+        for the listed languages.</li>
+      <li><strong>Add</strong>: Click this to add additional languages for
+        displaying web pages. In the dialog, select a language from the list.
+        If you want to add a language that is not in the list, type a language
+        code (both two- and three-letter codes can be used) in the field below
+        the list. See the online document
+        <a href="http://www.loc.gov/standards/iso639-2/php/code_list.php">Codes
+        for the Representation of Names of Languages</a> for a complete list of
+        language codes. Click OK to close the dialog and save your
+        changes.</li>
+      <li><strong>Remove</strong>: Click this to remove a selected
+        language.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Character Encoding</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Default Character Encoding</strong>: Use the drop-down list
+        to select the character encoding you want for displaying web
+        pages.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Spelling</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>When typing check my spelling</strong>: Use the drop-down
+        list to select if and how your typing is spell checked.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="helper_applications">Browser Preferences - Helper Applications</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Helper Applications preferences panel.
+  If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Browser category, click Helper Applications. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Helper Applications preferences panel lets you choose applications and
+  other handlers to handle different types of content (e.g. PDF documents).
+  It shows you a list of content types and lets you select a handler for each
+  type. To filter the list, use the search field. Text entered in there will
+  narrow the list to entries containing that text either in the type description
+  or the currently selected action.</p>
+<p>You can choose a local application to handle any type. For some types, you
+  can also choose a web application to handle the type, choose
+  <!-- a feature (like <a href="glossary.xhtml#live_bookmark">Live Bookmarks</a> for
+  feeds) or --> a <a href="glossary.xhtml#plugin">plugin</a> in &brandShortName; to
+  handle the type, or save the type on your computer.</p>
+<p>To choose a handler for a type, select the type from the list. The current
+  handler for the type will turn into a menu. Open the menu and select the
+  handler you want to handle the type. Depending on the actual type, you can:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Choose an application by selecting it from the menu. If you want a local
+    application that is not in the menu to handle the type, select
+    <strong>Use other…</strong> from the menu and navigate to its location.</li>
+  <li>Choose a <!-- feature or --> plugin by selecting it from the menu.</li>
+  <li>Save files of this type on your computer by selecting
+    <strong>Save File</strong> from the menu. If you have selected the
+    <strong>Automatically download files to specified download folder</strong>
+    preference in the <strong>Downloads</strong> panel, &brandShortName; will
+    save content of this type on your computer automatically. Otherwise, when
+    you encounter this type, &brandShortName; will prompt you for a location on
+    your computer to save it to.</li>
+  <li>Tell &brandShortName; to <strong>always ask</strong> what to do when
+    encountering this type. When you choose this option, a dialog will always be
+    shown when files of this type are accessed, and you can choose how to handle
+    that specific file from there.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Note:</strong> When a plugin is available to handle a type, and you
+  choose another handler for that type, &brandShortName; will only use your
+  chosen handler when you access the type directly. When the type is embedded
+  inside a web page, &brandShortName; will continue to use the plugin to handle
+  it. See also
+  <a href="nav_help.xhtml#plugins_and_downloads">Plugins and Downloads</a>.
+</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="location_bar">Browser Preferences - Location Bar</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Location Bar preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Browser category, click Location Bar. (If no subcategories
+    are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Location Bar Preferences panel lets you fine-tune the behavior of the
+  Location Bar.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li id="location_bar_autocomplete"><strong>Autocomplete</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Autocomplete from your browsing history as you type</strong>:
+        Select this to let &brandShortName; automatically show suggestions from
+        your browsing history when you type in the Location Bar.
+        <ul>
+          <li><strong>Match only websites you&apos;ve typed previously</strong>:
+            Shows only websites that you&apos;ve typed in the Location Bar and
+            not websites that were opened in other ways, such as clicking a link
+            on a web page.</li>
+          <li><strong>Only match locations, not website titles</strong>: Shows
+            only websites where the location matches what you typed. Websites
+            where the title matches what you typed will not show up as
+            autocomplete suggestions unless their location matches, too.</li>
+          <li><strong>Match</strong>:
+            <ul>
+              <li><strong>Anywhere in the location or title</strong>: The
+                autocomplete suggestions will include all websites where what
+                you typed matches any part of the website&apos;s location or
+                title.</li>
+              <li><strong>Anywhere but preferring word boundaries</strong>: The
+                autocomplete suggestions will include all websites where what
+                you typed matches any part of the website&apos;s location or
+                title but matches at word boundaries (see next point) are
+                preferred. This is the default setting.</li>
+              <li><strong>Only on word boundaries</strong>: The autocomplete
+                suggestions will include all websites where what you typed
+                matches the beginning of any word contained in the
+                website&apos;s location or title. Matches may also be found
+                inside a word if it contains medial capital letters (as in
+                CamelCase) since all non-lowercase characters are treated as
+                word boundaries.</li>
+              <li><strong>Only at the beginning of the location or
+                title</strong>: The autocomplete suggestions will include all
+                websites where what you typed matches the beginning of the
+                website&apos;s location or title.</li>
+            </ul></li>
+          <li><strong>Automatically prefill the best match</strong>: As you
+            type in the Location Bar, &brandShortName; will automatically
+            complete your web address using the visited website it most closely
+            matches. <span class="unix"><strong>Note</strong>: Having this
+            option on will prefill local addresses (like paths to files on your
+            hard drive) even if you have turned off <q>Autocomplete from your
+            browsing history as you type</q>.</span></li>
+          <li><strong>Show list of matching results</strong>: As you type in
+            the Location Bar, &brandShortName; will show a drop-down list of
+            matching visited web addresses.
+            <span class="unix"><strong>Note</strong>: If you have turned off
+            <q>Autocomplete from your browsing history as you type</q>
+            matching results from locations on your hard drive will still be
+            shown in the drop-down list.</span></li>
+        </ul></li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Internet Search Engine</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Show default search engine</strong>: Shows a drop-down list item,
+        allowing you to search with the default search engine for words you
+        enter.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Unknown Locations</strong>
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Add <q>www.</q> and <q>.com</q> to the location if a web page
+        is not found</strong>: Select this if you want &brandShortName; to
+        automatically add <tt>www.</tt> to the beginning and <tt>.com</tt> to
+        the end of a web page location that can&apos;t be found. For more
+        detailed information about this feature, see the online document
+        <a href="http://www.mozilla.org/docs/end-user/domain-guessing.html">
+        Domain Guessing</a>.</li>
+      <li><strong>Perform a web search when entered text is not a web
+        location</strong>: Select this to let &brandShortName; automatically
+        search the web for text entered in the Location Bar. If the text
+        you&apos;ve typed is not a web location, &brandShortName; will do a web
+        search when you press <kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd>
+        <kbd class="mac">Return</kbd> in the Location Bar.
+        <strong>Note</strong>: The search engine used can not be
+        changed by the <a href="#internet_search">Internet Search
+        Preferences</a>.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="internet_search">Browser Preferences - Internet Search</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Internet Search preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Browser category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories
+    are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Internet Search preferences panel allows you to configure how you search
+  using &brandShortName;:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Default Search Engine</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Search using</strong>: Use the drop-down list to select the
+        search engine you want use for web searching.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Search Results</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Open the Search tab in the Sidebar when search results are
+        available</strong>: Select this to have &brandShortName; open the
+        Sidebar and show your search results.</li>
+      <li><strong>Open tab instead of window for a context menu web
+        search</strong>: Select this to have &brandShortName; show your search
+        results in a new tab rather than a new window when you search on
+        selected words in a web page.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Sidebar Search Tab Preference</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Basic</strong>: Choose this to use one search engine when
+        searching in &brandShortName;.</li>
+      <li><strong>Advanced</strong>: <strong></strong>Choose this to select one
+        or more search engines from a list when searching in
+        &brandShortName;.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="tabbed_browsing">Browser Preferences - Tabbed Browsing</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Tabbed Browsing preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Browser category, click Tabbed Browsing. (If no subcategories
+    are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Tabbed Browsing preferences panel allows you to set up Tabbed
+  Browsing:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Tab Display</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Hide the tab bar when only one tab is open</strong>: Select
+        this to display the Tabbed Browsing bar only when more then one
+        browser tab is open.</li>
+      <li><strong>Switch to new tabs opened from links</strong>: Select this to
+        make &brandShortName; switch to the new tab when using <q>Open in a
+        New Tab</q> to open a link.</li>
+      <li><strong>Warn me when closing a window with multiple tabs</strong>:
+        Select this to make &brandShortName; warn you when you try to close a
+        browser window which has multiple tabs open in it.</li>
+      <li><strong>Open related tabs after current tab</strong>:
+        Select this to make new tabs open next to the tab from which they have
+        been opened. When unchecked, new tabs open after the last tab on the
+        tab bar.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>When opening a bookmark group</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Add tabs</strong>: Select this if you want a bookmark group
+        to be opened in new tabs.</li>
+      <li><strong>Replace existing tabs</strong>: Select this if you want a
+        bookmark group to replace your existing tabs.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Open tabs instead of windows for</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong><span class="mac"><kbd>Cmd</kbd>+click or
+        <kbd>Cmd</kbd>+<kbd>Return</kbd></span>
+        <span class="noMac">Middle-click, <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+click or
+        <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>Enter</kbd> on links in a Web
+        page</span></strong>: Select this to open Web page links in a new tab
+        when clicking a link <span class="mac">and holding down the
+        <kbd>Command</kbd> key or holding down the <kbd>Command</kbd> key and
+        pressing <kbd>Return</kbd> on links</span> <span class="noMac">with the
+        middle mouse button, <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-clicking on links, and pressing
+        <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>Enter</kbd> on links</span>.
+
+        <p><strong>Tip</strong>: Use Find Links as You Type to navigate to the
+          link you want to open with the keyboard commands above.</p>
+      </li>
+
+      <li><strong>
+        <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd
+        class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> in the Location
+        bar</strong>: Select this to open a Web page in a new tab when you type
+        the URL of the page in the Location Bar and press
+        <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd
+        class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd>.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="link_behavior">Browser Preferences - Link Behavior</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Link Behavior preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Browser category, click Link Behavior. (If no subcategories
+    are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Link Behavior preferences panel allows you to configure how links are
+  opened in &brandShortName;:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Link open behavior</strong>: If a webpage is designed so that
+    certain links open in a new window by default, you may want to override
+    this. You can define the behavior separately for links with a target
+    attribute and windows opened using JavaScript:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Open links meant to open a new window in</strong>:
+        <ul>
+          <li><strong>The current tab/window</strong>: Open the linked page in
+            the current tab of the active window.</li>
+          <li><strong>A new tab in the current window</strong>: Open the linked
+            page in a new tab instead of a new window.</li>
+          <li><strong>A new window</strong>: Open the linked page in a new
+            window. (This does not override the webpage design and disables
+            the below options for pages opened from scripts.)</li>
+        </ul>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>When scripts want to open a new window</strong>:
+        <ul>
+          <li><strong>Always divert windows into tabs</strong>: Open the page to
+            be loaded in a tab according to the above settings.</li>
+          <li><strong>Don&apos;t divert custom windows into tabs</strong>: Open
+            the page to be loaded in a popup window if the script explicitly
+            specifies features of the new window (such as size or position),
+            else open the page in a tab according to the above settings.</li>
+          <li><strong>Always open new windows</strong>: Open the page to be
+            loaded in a new window. (This does not override the webpage
+            design.)</li>
+        </ul>
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Links from other applications</strong>: If &brandShortName; is
+    called from another application with a webpage address as an argument (like
+    a click on a link in an external email program), you can control where the
+    page will be loaded:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>The current tab/window</strong>: Open the linked page in the
+        current tab of the active window.</li>
+      <li><strong>A new tab in the current window</strong>: Open the linked
+        page in a new tab instead of a new window.</li>
+      <li><strong>A new window</strong>: Open the linked page in a new
+        window.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<div class="win">
+  <p>To ensure that &brandShortName; opens a new window, select the Browser
+    option in <a href="cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml#appearance">Appearance
+    Preferences - Appearance</a>.</p>
+
+  <p>If you want &brandShortName; to open a new tab instead of a new window when
+    you launch it and it is already running, ensure the following:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>If &brandShortName; is launched from the command line, no command line
+      parameters that open windows (like <kbd>-new-window</kbd>) are used.</li>
+    <li>No <q>When &brandShortName; starts up, open</q> option is set in
+      <a href="cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml#appearance">Appearance Preferences
+      - Appearance</a>.</li>
+    <li>The <q>Links from other applications</q> preference is set to <q>A new
+      tab in the current window</q>.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="downloads">Browser Preferences - Downloads</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Downloads preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Browser category, click Downloads. (If no subcategories are
+    visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Downloads preferences panel allows you to set up how &brandShortName;
+  handles files you download from web pages:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>When starting a download</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Flash the download manager if it is already open</strong>:
+        Select this to change focus to the Download Manager if it is currently
+        open. It displays the status for current and previous downloads in a
+        single window. This option only takes effect if the Download Manager
+        is already open and overrides the other settings.</li>
+      <li><strong>Open the download manager</strong>: Select this to display
+        the Download Manager when starting a new download. It will be opened
+        if the window isn&apos;t currently shown.</li>
+      <li><strong>Open a progress dialog</strong>: Select this to display a
+        progress dialog box, which display the status for your current
+        download. The status of each download is kept in a separate
+        window.</li>
+      <li><strong>Don&apos;t open anything</strong>: Select this if you want to
+        download files invisibly. No status is given for all your
+        downloads.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>When saving a file</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Save files to</strong>: Select this if you want files to be
+        saved to the specified folder without &brandShortName; prompting you
+        for the download location.</li>
+      <li><strong>Always ask me where to save files</strong>: Select this if
+        you always want to be able to choose a folder for the file to be saved.
+        The default will be the folder you last downloaded a file to.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Download history</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Remove download entries</strong>: This determines when
+        a completed entry is removed from the Download Manager listing
+        (the downloaded file itself will <em>not</em> be affected):
+        <ul>
+          <li><strong>When they have completed</strong>: Select this to
+            remove an entry immediately once the download is successfully
+            completed.</li>
+          <li><strong>When quitting &brandShortName;</strong>: Select this
+            to retain all entries until closing the program, the list will
+            be empty upon restarting &brandShortName;.</li>
+          <li><strong>Never</strong>: Select this to not remove <em>any</em>
+            entry automatically, even after &brandShortName; is restarted.
+            You can remove them manually in the Download Manager.</li>
+        </ul>
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>When a download completes</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Play a sound</strong>: Select this if you want
+        &brandShortName; to play a custom sound (typically in WAV format) when
+        a download is completed. Use the Browse button to select the sound file
+        in the file locator. To listen to the sound you&apos;ve chosen, click
+        Play.</li>
+      <li><strong>Show an alert</strong>: Select this if you want
+        &brandShortName; to show an alert on the screen when a download is
+        completed.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>For more information about downloading files from web pages, see
+  <a href= "nav_help.xhtml#plugins_and_downloads">Plugins and
+  Downloads</a>.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+</body>
+</html>
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_priv_prefs_popup.xhtml
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>&brandShortName; Popup Blocking Help</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<div class="boilerPlate">This document is provided for your information only.
+  It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security of
+  your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however,
+  address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a
+  recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and security
+  protection on the Internet.</div>
+  
+<h1 id="controlling_popups">Controlling Popups</h1>
+
+<p><strong>What are Popups?</strong></p>
+
+<p>Pop-up windows, or popups, are windows that appear automatically and without
+  your permission. They vary in size, but usually don&apos;t cover the whole
+  screen. Some popups open on top of the current browser window, thus popping
+  up, while others appear underneath the browser (popunders).</p>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; allows you to control both popups and popunders through the
+  <a href="#privacy_and_security_preferences_popup_windows">Popup Windows
+  preferences panel</a>. Since popup blocking is turned off by default, you
+  must enable it to prevent popups from appearing in the browser.</p>
+
+<p>When blocking a popup, &brandShortName; can be set up to play a sound or
+  display an icon
+  <img src="chrome://navigator/skin/icons/popup-blocked.png" alt="Popup control
+  icon"/> in the status bar or a notification bar at the top of the website
+  content area, or any combination of the above. You can use the icon or the
+  bar to add a website you&apos;re viewing to an exceptions list so that the
+  website is allowed to again display popups.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Blocking popups may interfere with some websites</strong>: Some
+  websites, including some banking sites, use popups for important features.
+  Blocking all popups disables such features. To allow specific websites to
+  use popups, while blocking all others, you can add specific websites to the
+  list of allowed websites. For more information, see
+  <a href="#privacy_and_security_preferences_popup_windows">Privacy &amp;
+  Security Preferences - Popup Windows</a>.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Blocking popups doesn&apos;t always work</strong>: Although
+  &brandShortName; blocks most popups, some websites, even when blocked, may
+  use other methods to show popups.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Allowing popups from certain websites</strong>: After you&apos;ve
+  enabled popup blocking, you can still allow specific websites to display
+  popups. Browse to the website, and then from the Tools menu, choose Popup
+  Manager, and then choose Allow Popups From This Website.</p>
+
+<p>The next section describes how to control popups through preferences and
+  through the popup control icon.</p>
+
+<h2 id="privacy_and_security_preferences_popup_windows">Privacy &amp; Security
+  Preferences - Popup Windows</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Popup Windows preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the
+    <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Privacy &amp; Security Preferences category, click Popup
+    Windows. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy &amp;
+    Security to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Block unrequested popup windows</strong>: Select this to prevent
+    popups from appearing in the browser.</li>
+  <li><strong>Allowed Websites</strong>: Click this to view and edit the list of
+    websites that you want to allow to display popups.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Allowed Websites - Popups</strong>: The list of allowed
+        websites appears when you click <q>Allowed Sites</q>. You can add or
+        remove websites that should be allowed to show popups.</li>
+      <li><strong>Allow</strong>: Click this after typing in a website that you
+        want to add to the list.</li>
+      <li><strong>Remove Website</strong>: Click this to remove a selected
+        website.</li>
+      <li><strong>Remove All Websites</strong>: Click this to remove all of the
+        websites in the current list.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3>When a popup window has been blocked</h3>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Play a sound</strong>: If you want a sound to play each time
+    the browser blocks a popup, select this option and choose System beep
+    or Custom sound file. Selecting Custom sound file enables the following two
+    buttons:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Browse</strong>: Click this to choose a sound file.</li>
+      <li><strong>Play</strong>: Click this to listen to the chosen
+        sound.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Display an icon in the browser status bar</strong>: Select this
+    to display an icon
+    <img src="chrome://navigator/skin/icons/popup-blocked.png" alt="Popup control
+    icon"/> in the browser status bar to indicate that a popup is blocked.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: After the popup control icon
+      <img src="chrome://navigator/skin/icons/popup-blocked.png" alt="Popup
+      control icon"/> appears, it remains visible until you visit another
+      website.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Display a notification bar at the top of the content area</strong>:
+    Select this to display a notification bar above the website content area
+    whenever a popup is blocked. In the bar, use the Preferences button to choose
+    how to handle popups from that website.
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Using the popup control icon or notification bar to add allowed
+  websites</strong>: You can use the popup control icon or notification bar to
+  quickly add a website to the list of allowed websites. Click the icon
+  <img src="chrome://navigator/skin/icons/popup-blocked.png" alt="Popup control
+  icon"/> to open the list of allowed websites. The current website is
+  already filled in. Click Allow and then click OK to confirm your addition.
+  Similarly you can use the notification bar to allow popups from the current
+  website or open the list of allowed websites through Manage Popups. Just
+  click the Preferences button at the right end of the notification bar.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Blocking popups may not always work and may interfere
+  with some websites. For more information about blocking popups, see
+  <a href="#controlling_popups">Controlling Popups</a>.</p>
+
+</body>
+</html>
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/customize_help.xhtml
@@ -0,0 +1,1406 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>Customizing &brandShortName;</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<div class="boilerPlate">This document is provided for your information
+  only. It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security
+  of your personal information on the Internet. This document does not,
+  however, address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it
+  represent a recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and
+  security protection on the Internet.</div>
+
+<h1 id="customizing_mozilla">Customizing &brandShortName;</h1>
+
+<p>You can customize &brandShortName; to better suit your needs using features
+  like Sidebar, bookmarks, Tabbed Browsing, and Add-ons.</p>
+
+<p>This section describes the customizable aspects of &brandShortName;&apos;s
+  browser component.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#sidebar">Sidebar</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#tabbed_browsing">Tabbed Browsing</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#changing_fonts_colors_and_themes">Changing Fonts, Colors, and
+      Themes</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#toolbars">Toolbars</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#bookmarks">Bookmarks</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#add-ons">Add-ons</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#specifying_how_mozilla_starts_up">Specifying How
+      &brandShortName; Starts Up</a></li>
+    <li><a href="cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml">Appearance
+      Preferences</a></li>
+    <li><a href="cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml">Browser
+      Preferences</a></li>
+    <li><a href="cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml">Advanced Preferences</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="sidebar">Sidebar</h2>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#what_is_sidebar">What is Sidebar?</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#opening_closing_and_resizing_sidebar">Opening, Closing and
+      Resizing Sidebar</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#viewing_sidebar_tabs">Viewing Sidebar Tabs</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#adding_sidebar_tabs">Adding Sidebar Tabs</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#customizing_individual_sidebar_tabs">Customizing Individual
+      Sidebar Tabs</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#reorganizing_sidebar_tabs">Reorganizing Sidebar Tabs</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#removing_sidebar_tabs">Removing Sidebar Tabs</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="what_is_sidebar">What is Sidebar?</h3>
+
+<p>Sidebar is a customizable area in your browser where you can keep items
+  that you need to use all the time&mdash;the latest news and weather, your
+  address book, stock quotes, a calendar&mdash;and many other available
+  options. Sidebar presents these items to you in tabs that are continually
+  updated.</p>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; comes with some Sidebar tabs already set up, but you can
+  customize Sidebar by adding, removing, and rearranging tabs.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#sidebar">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="opening_closing_and_resizing_sidebar">Opening, Closing and Resizing
+  Sidebar</h3>
+
+<p>To open Sidebar, <span class="noMac">press <kbd>F9</kbd> or</span> open the
+  View menu in the browser, choose Show/Hide, and then Sidebar from the
+  submenu.</p>
+
+<p>Once Sidebar is opened, you can use its handle to close, open and resize
+  Sidebar&apos;s frame. Move the mouse pointer up and down along the left edge
+  of the &brandShortName; window. The pointer changes to a hand when it touches
+  the <q>handle</q> for Sidebar, as shown in the picture.</p>
+
+<table summary="Image table">
+  <tr>
+    <td colspan="2"></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr style="vertical-align: top;">
+    <td><img src="images/sidebar.png" alt="image of sidebar with
+      handle"/></td>
+    <td style="vertical-align: middle;">
+      <p><strong>Sidebar<br/>Handle</strong></p>
+    </td>
+  </tr>
+</table>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click the handle to close/open Sidebar&apos;s frame</li>
+  <li>Click and drag the handle to resize Sidebar&apos;s frame</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To close Sidebar with its handle, do one of the following:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li class="noMac">Press <kbd>F9</kbd></li>
+  <li>Click the X in the upper-right corner of Sidebar</li>
+  <li>Open the View menu, choose Show/Hide, and then Sidebar from the
+    submenu</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#sidebar">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="viewing_sidebar_tabs">Viewing Sidebar Tabs</h3>
+
+<p>To view a tab:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click a tab&apos;s title; for instance, click the word <q>Search</q>. The
+    Search tab opens, which allows you to search for web pages.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To reload a Sidebar tab, right-click on the tab title
+  and choose Reload from the pop-up menu.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#sidebar">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="adding_sidebar_tabs">Adding Sidebar Tabs</h3>
+
+<p>To add a new tab:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click <q>Tabs</q> at the top of Sidebar, and select Customize
+    Sidebar from the menu</li>
+  <li>In the Customize Sidebar dialog box, select a tab from the list on the
+    left. Double-click the folders to open or close folders.</li>
+  <li>Click Add.</li>
+  <li>Continue adding as many tabs as you want.</li>
+  <li>Click OK to finish.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: If you add more than eight tabs to Sidebar,
+  &brandShortName; hides the remaining tabs to reduce clutter. To scroll
+  through the hidden tabs, click the down arrow button at the bottom of Sidebar
+  until you see the desired tab. Click the up arrow button to once again scroll
+  up.</p>
+  
+<p><strong>Tips</strong>:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>To preview a Sidebar tab before adding it, select a tab from the list
+    on the left side of the Customize Sidebar dialog box and click Preview.
+    After a few seconds, the tab displays in the Tab Preview pop-up
+    window.</li>
+  <li>To view an extensive and categorized list of tabs available for Sidebar,
+    click <q>Tabs</q> at the top of Sidebar, and select Sidebar
+    Directory.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>You can also turn Sidebar tabs on and off.</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click <q>Tabs</q> at the top of Sidebar. Current tabs are listed in
+    the lower part of the menu.</li>
+  <li>Select the tabs you want displayed in Sidebar. Remove the checkmark
+    (deselect) to turn a tab off (it will still be available from the
+    menu).</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To quickly turn off a Sidebar tab, right-click on its
+  name and choose Hide Tab.</p>
+  
+<p>[<a href="#sidebar">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="customizing_individual_sidebar_tabs">Customizing Individual Sidebar
+  Tabs</h3>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Not all tabs can be customized.</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click <q>Tabs</q> at the top of Sidebar and select Customize Sidebar
+    from the menu.</li>
+  <li>Select an available tab from the list on the right.</li>
+  <li>Click Customize Tab if it is enabled. A window appears with information
+    and options for customizing the tab.
+    
+    <p>The instructions vary depending on the source of the tab&mdash;in
+      addition to &brandShortName;, tab providers can be any company,
+      organization, or individual who uses the Internet.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>After you follow the tab provider&apos;s instructions, close the
+    customization window (or follow the provider&apos;s instructions to close
+    it).</li>
+  <li>Click OK to finish.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#sidebar">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="reorganizing_sidebar_tabs">Reorganizing Sidebar Tabs</h3>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click <q>Tabs</q> at the top of Sidebar and select Customize Sidebar from
+    the menu.</li>
+  <li>Select a tab from the list on the right.</li>
+  <li>Click Up and Down to change the tab&apos;s placement.</li>
+  <li>Repeat steps 1 and 2 to continue reorganizing as many tabs as you
+    like.</li>
+  <li>Click OK to finish.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#sidebar">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="removing_sidebar_tabs">Removing Sidebar Tabs</h3>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click <q>Tabs</q> at the top of Sidebar and select Customize Sidebar from
+    the menu.</li>
+  <li>Select a tab from the list on the right.</li>
+  <li>Click Remove.</li>
+  <li>Continue removing as many tabs as you like.</li>
+  <li>Click OK to finish.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#sidebar">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="tabbed_browsing">Tabbed Browsing</h2>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#what_is_tabbed_browsing">What is Tabbed Browsing?</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#setting_up_tabbed_browsing">Setting up Tabbed Browsing</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#opening_tabs">Opening Tabs</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#moving_tabs">Moving Tabs</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#bookmarking_tabs">Bookmarking Tabs</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#closing_tabs">Closing Tabs</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="what_is_tabbed_browsing">What is Tabbed Browsing?</h3>
+
+<p>Tabbed Browsing lets you open more than one web page in a single window.
+  Each web page has its own tab across the top of a single browser window.
+  Each tab appears on the Tab Bar. For example, you can visit mozilla.org,
+  icq.com, and cnn.com within one window instead of three windows.</p>
+
+<table summary="Image table">
+  <tr> 
+    <td>Click this to open a new tab.</td>
+    <td></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr> 
+    <td colspan="2">
+      <img src="images/tabbed_browsing_bar.png" alt="tab bar"/>
+    </td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr> 
+    <td style="text-align: left;">Tab being viewed.</td>
+    <td style="text-align: right;">Click this to close the tab being
+      viewed.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr> 
+    <td colspan="2" style="text-align: center;"><strong>Tab Bar</strong></td>
+  </tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>You don&apos;t need to have several windows open to visit several web pages;
+  thus, freeing up more space on your desktop. Instead, you can open, close,
+  and reload web pages conveniently in one place without having to switch to
+  another window.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#tabbed_browsing">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="setting_up_tabbed_browsing">Setting up Tabbed Browsing</h3>
+
+<p>There are several ways to customize Tabbed Browsing. For example, you can
+  change your preferences to open new browser tabs from the Location Bar. You
+  can set up Tabbed Browsing in other ways too, such as loading new browser
+  tabs in the background so the first page is kept on top while the second page
+  is loading. To learn more about setting up Tabbed Browsing in
+  &brandShortName;, see
+  <a href="cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml#tabbed_browsing">Browser Preferences
+  - Tabbed Browsing</a>.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#tabbed_browsing">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="opening_tabs">Opening Tabs</h3>
+
+<p>You can open a browser tab in the following ways:</p>
+
+<p><strong>Opening a New Blank Browser Tab</strong>:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>From the File menu</strong>: Open the File menu, choose New, and
+    then Browser Tab.</li>
+  <li><strong>From the Tab Bar</strong>: If visible, click the <q>new
+    tab</q> icon
+    <img src="chrome://navigator/skin/icons/tab-new.gif" alt="new tab icon"/>
+    on the left side of the Tab Bar.</li>
+  <li><strong>From a pop-up menu</strong>: If the Tab Bar is visible,
+    right-click on it, and choose New Tab from the pop.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Opening a Web Page Link in a Browser Tab</strong>:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>From a pop-up menu</strong>: Right-click<span class="mac"> or, if
+    you have a one-button mouse, <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-click</span> on a web page
+    link and choose Open Link in New Tab.</li>
+  <li><strong>From the Location Bar</strong>: Type a web page location in the
+    Location Bar and press <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd><kbd class="noMac">
+    Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd>.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: You must set your Tabbed Browsing preferences to
+      open a browser tab from the Location Bar. See
+      <a href="cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml#tabbed_browsing">Browser
+      Preferences - Tabbed Browsing</a> for more information.</p>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Tips</strong>:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>To quickly open a new browser tab, press
+    <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd>
+    <kbd class="noMac">Ctrl</kbd>+<kbd>T</kbd>.</li>
+  <li>To reload one or all browser tabs, right-click<span class="mac"> or, if
+    you have a one-button mouse, <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-click</span> anywhere on the
+    Tab Bar and select Reload Tab or Reload All Tabs, respectively.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#tabbed_browsing">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="moving_tabs">Moving Tabs</h3>
+
+<p>Tabs are displayed in the order you open them, which may not always be what
+  you want. To move a tab to a different location within a &brandShortName;
+  window, simply drag it there using your mouse. While you are dragging the
+  tab, &brandShortName; displays an indicator to show where the tab will be
+  moved. Alternately, you can use
+  <a href="shortcuts_navigator.xhtml#tabbed_browsing_shortcuts">keyboard
+  shortcuts</a> to move tabs within a window if desired.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: The keyboard shortcuts don&apos;t work when a text
+  box has focus.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#tabbed_browsing">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="bookmarking_tabs">Bookmarking Tabs</h3>
+
+<p>A bookmarked group of tabs is called a Groupmark. To bookmark the group of
+  browser tabs in the current window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Bookmarks menu and choose <q>Bookmark This Group of
+    Tabs</q>.</li>
+  <li>Type a name for the bookmark group in the Name field.</li>
+  <li>Choose a folder in which to create your Groupmark, or click New Folder to
+    create a new folder for your Groupmark.</li>
+  <li>Click OK to add the Groupmark.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To learn how to use a group of tabs as your home page,
+  see <a href="cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml#navigator">Browser Preferences -
+  Browser</a>.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#tabbed_browsing">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="closing_tabs">Closing Tabs</h3>
+
+<p>You can close browser tabs in several ways:</p>
+
+<p><strong>Closing the Browser Tab Being Viewed</strong>:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Close Tab.</li>
+  <li>Click the <q>X</q> button on the right side of the Tab Bar.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<table summary="Image table">
+  <tr>
+    <td> Click this to open a new tab.</td>
+    <td></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td colspan="2">
+      <img src="images/tabbed_browsing_bar.png" alt="tab bar"/>
+    </td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td style="text-align: left;">Tab being viewed.</td>
+    <td style="text-align: right;">Click this to close the tab being
+      viewed.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td colspan="2" style="text-align: center;"><strong>Tab Bar</strong></td>
+  </tr>
+</table>
+
+<p><strong>Tips</strong>:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>To close any browser tab, even if hidden, right-click on the tab and
+    choose Close Tab from the pop-up menu.</li>
+  <li>To keep only one browser tab open, while closing all other tabs,
+    right-click on the browser tab and choose Close Other Tabs.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#tabbed_browsing">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="changing_fonts_colors_and_themes">Changing Fonts, Colors, and
+  Themes</h2>
+  
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#changing_the_default_fonts">Changing the Default Fonts</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#changing_the_default_colors">Changing the Default
+      Colors</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#changing_the_theme">Changing the Theme</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="changing_the_default_fonts">Changing the Default Fonts</h3>
+
+<p>Normally, web pages are displayed in the default font set by your browser
+  or in a font chosen by the web pages&apos; authors.</p>
+
+<p>To change the default fonts:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Appearance category, choose Fonts. (If no options are visible
+    in this category, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)</li>
+  <li>From the "Fonts for" drop-down list, choose a language group/script.
+    For instance, to set default fonts for West European languages/script
+    (Latin), choose <q>Western</q>.</li>
+  <li>Select whether proportional text should be serif (like Times Roman) or
+    sans-serif (like Arial). Then specify the font size you want for
+    proportional text.</li>
+  <li>If an appropriate font is available for your language/script, select
+    fonts for Serif, Sans-Serif, Cursive, Fantasy, and Monospace. You can also
+    specify what font size you want for monospace text.</li>
+  <li>Specify whether the default font should be serif or sans serif.</li>
+  <li>Select a fixed-width font and size. Certain types of text, such as
+    equations and formulas, are displayed in a fixed-width font.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Many web page authors choose their own fonts and font sizes. To allow fonts
+  other than the ones specified in your preferences, check <q>Allow
+  documents to use other fonts</q>.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#changing_fonts_colors_and_themes">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="changing_the_default_colors">Changing the Default Colors</h3>
+
+<p>Normally, the background and text colors on web pages are determined by the
+  default colors set by your browser or by the pages&apos; authors.</p>
+
+<p>To change the default colors:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Appearance category, choose Colors. (If no options are visible
+    in this category, click to expand the list.)</li>
+  <li>Click the colored blocks next to Text, Background, Unvisited Links, and
+    Visited Links. Choose a color for each from the color chart. You can also
+    specify that links should be underlined.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Most web page authors choose their own colors. You can override the
+  authors&apos; intentions by selecting <q>Use my chosen colors, ignoring
+  the colors specified</q>.</p>
+
+<p>When viewing the source of a web page, you can see the HTML syntax of the
+  source of a web page highlighted in specific colors by selecting <q>Enable
+  syntax highlighting</q>.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#changing_fonts_colors_and_themes">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="changing_the_theme">Changing the Theme</h3>
+
+<p>You can change the look and feel of &brandShortName; by using a different
+  theme. Changing the theme can be done either from the View menu or from the
+  Add-on Manager.</p>
+
+<p>From the View menu:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the View menu and choose Apply Theme, and then select a theme from
+    the menu.</li>
+  <li>Quit and restart &brandShortName;.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>From the Add-on Manager:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Tools menu and choose Add-on Manager.</li>
+  <li>Click the Themes button in the toolbar.</li>
+  <li>Select a theme from the list, and then click the Use Theme button.</li>
+  <li>Quit and restart &brandShortName;.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#changing_fonts_colors_and_themes">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="toolbars">Toolbars</h2>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#navigation_toolbar">Navigation Toolbar</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#personal_toolbar">Personal Toolbar</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#status_bar">Status Bar</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#component_bar">Component Bar</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#hiding_a_toolbar">Hiding a Toolbar</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="navigation_toolbar">Navigation Toolbar</h3>
+
+<p>The Navigation Toolbar, pictured here, helps you move around the Web.</p>
+
+<table summary="Image table">
+  <tr>
+    <td colspan="4">
+      <img src="images/reload.gif" alt="navigation toolbar"/>
+    </td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td><strong>Back</strong></td>
+    <td><strong>Forward</strong></td>
+    <td><strong>Reload</strong></td>
+    <td><strong>Stop</strong></td>
+  </tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>[<a href="#toolbars">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="personal_toolbar">Personal Toolbar</h3>
+
+<p>The Personal Toolbar is completely customizable&mdash;you decide what you
+  want to keep there.</p>
+
+<table summary="Image table">
+  <tr> 
+    <td><img src="images/personalbar.png" alt="Personal Toolbar"/></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td style="text-align: center;"><strong>Personal Toolbar</strong></td>
+  </tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>You can easily add, delete, and rearrange items in the Personal Toolbar.</p>
+
+<h4 id="adding_personal_toolbar_bookmarks">Adding Personal Toolbar
+  Bookmarks</h4>
+
+<p>You can add buttons for your favorite bookmarks, or folders containing
+  groups of bookmarks. To create a new bookmark to add to the Personal
+  Toolbar:</p>
+  
+<ol>
+  <li>Open a web page you want to bookmark.</li>
+  <li>Drag the bookmark icon
+    <img src="chrome://communicator/skin/bookmarks/bookmark-item.png"
+    alt="image of bookmark icon"/>(located to the left of URL in the
+    Location Bar) to a desired place on the Personal Toolbar. You can drag the
+    icon directly to the Personal Toolbar, or to a folder on the Personal
+    Toolbar. For more information, see
+    <a href="#adding_bookmark_folders_to_the_personal_toolbar">Adding Bookmark
+    Folders to the Personal Toolbar</a>.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: The bookmark icon
+  <img src="chrome://communicator/skin/bookmarks/bookmark-item.png" alt="image
+  of bookmark icon"/> may appear as another page-specific icon if you have
+  checked Show Website Icons in preferences. See
+  <a href="cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml#appearance">Appearance Preferences -
+  Appearance</a> for more information on changing this preferences.</p>
+
+<p>Each item in the Personal Toolbar folder appears as a toolbar button. You
+  may need to enlarge the browser window to see them all.</p>
+
+<p id="adding_bookmark_folders_to_the_personal_toolbar"><strong>Adding
+  Bookmark Folders to the Personal Toolbar</strong></p>
+
+<p>You can add bookmark folders to the Personal Toolbar to sort your favorite
+  bookmarks into categories. For example, you can have one folder on the
+  Personal Toolbar for hobby-related bookmarks and another folder for
+  work-related bookmarks. To add a new bookmark to the Personal Toolbar:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.</li>
+  <li>Select your designated <q>Personal Toolbar Folder</q>.</li>
+  <li>Click New Folder on the toolbar.</li>
+  <li> Type a name for your new bookmark folder. By default, the name is
+    <q>New Folder</q>.</li>
+  <li>Click OK to confirm your new bookmark folder name.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The new bookmark folder will appear at the end of the Personal Toolbar.</p>
+
+<h4>Designating a Bookmark Folder as Your Personal Toolbar Folder</h4>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.</li>
+  <li>Select the bookmark folder whose items you want to appear on the
+    toolbar.</li>
+  <li>From the View menu, choose Set as Personal Toolbar Folder.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The buttons in your Personal Toolbar now correspond to the bookmarks in the
+  folder you designated.</p>
+
+<h4>Removing Bookmarks from the Personal Toolbar</h4>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.</li>
+  <li>Click the Personal Toolbar Folder.</li>
+  <li>Select the bookmark or folder you want to delete.</li>
+  <li>Press Delete on your keyboard.</li>
+  <li>Close the Manage Bookmarks window.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To quickly remove a bookmark placed on the Personal
+  Toolbar (not in a folder), right-click on the bookmark and select Delete.</p>
+
+<h4>Rearranging the Personal Toolbar</h4>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.</li>
+  <li>In your Bookmarks window, click the Personal Toolbar Folder.</li>
+  <li>Select a bookmark or folder and drag it to a new location.</li>
+  <li>When you are finished rearranging items, close your Bookmarks
+    window.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To move a bookmark placed on the Personal Toolbar
+  quickly, click and drag the bookmark to another location on the Personal
+  Toolbar or to a folder.</p>
+  
+<p>[<a href="#toolbars">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="status_bar">Status Bar</h3>
+
+<p>The Status Bar is located at the bottom of any &brandShortName; window. It
+  includes the following:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Component Bar: Allows you to switch between components. For more
+    information, see <a href="#component_bar">Component Bar</a>.</li>
+  <li>Status information: Displays information like the web-page URL and load
+    status information.</li>
+  <li>Cookie notification icon
+    <img src="chrome://communicator/skin/permissions/taskbar-cookie.gif"
+    alt="cookie notification icon"/>: 
+    Appears when a website has used a cookie in a way that requires you to be
+    notified. For more information, see
+    <a href="using_priv_help.xhtml#cookie_notification">Cookie
+    Notification</a>.</li>
+  <li>Work Offline
+    <img src="chrome://communicator/skin/icons/offline.png"
+    alt="work offline icon"/> or Work Online
+    <img src="chrome://communicator/skin/icons/online.png"
+    alt="work online icon"/> icon: Click the icon to toggle working
+    offline or online. Working offline prevents &brandShortName; from
+    attempting to connect to the Internet, for example to load images on web
+    pages or automatically check email.</li>
+  <li>Lock icon (Example:
+    <img src="chrome://communicator/skin/icons/lock-insecure.png"
+    alt="lock icon"/>): Indicates whether the entire contents of the page
+    was encrypted while it was being received by your computer. For more
+    information, see
+    <a href="using_certs_help.xhtml#checking_security_for_a_web_page">Checking
+    Security for a Web Page</a>.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#toolbars">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="component_bar">Component Bar</h3>
+
+<p>Use the Component Bar at the bottom left of any &brandShortName; window to
+  switch between tasks (such as browsing or mail).</p>
+  
+<p><img src="images/taskbar.png" alt="component bar"/></p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#toolbars">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="hiding_a_toolbar">Hiding a Toolbar</h3>
+
+<p>There are two ways to hide the toolbars.</p>
+
+<p>To minimize a toolbar:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click the small triangle at the left of the toolbar. To show the toolbar,
+    click the triangle again. (Note: You cannot hide the Component Bar using
+    this method.)</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To completely hide a toolbar, including its triangle:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the View menu.</li>
+  <li>Choose Show/Hide and uncheck the toolbars you want to hide.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To reverse this action, open the View menu, choose Show, and then select
+  the toolbars you want to show.</p>
+  
+<p>[<a href="#toolbars">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="bookmarks">Bookmarks</h2>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#what_are_bookmarks">What Are Bookmarks?</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#using_bookmarks">Using Bookmarks</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#creating_new_bookmarks">Creating New Bookmarks</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#organizing_your_bookmarks">Organizing Your Bookmarks</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#changing_individual_bookmarks">Changing Individual
+      Bookmarks</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#searching_your_bookmarks">Searching Your Bookmarks</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#exporting_or_importing_a_bookmark_list">Exporting or
+      Importing a Bookmark List</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="what_are_bookmarks">What Are Bookmarks?</h3>
+
+<p>Bookmarks are shortcuts to your favorite and most-visited web pages. Rather
+  than typing in long URLs (web addresses), you can create bookmarks that take
+  you directly to the pages you want to see.</p>
+
+<p>You access your bookmarks through the Bookmarks menu, the Bookmarks tab on
+  Sidebar, and the Manage Bookmarks window. You can control what&apos;s listed
+  in the Bookmarks menu by adding bookmarks for your favorite web pages and
+  organizing your list of bookmarks any way you want.</p>
+
+<h3 id="using_bookmarks">Using Bookmarks</h3>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; comes with some bookmarks already available. To use a
+  bookmark:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Bookmarks menu.</li>
+  <li>Choose a bookmark from the list or from a folder in the list.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#bookmarks">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="creating_new_bookmarks">Creating New Bookmarks</h3>
+
+<p>You can bookmark your favorite websites to make it easy to return to
+  them.</p>
+
+<p>To bookmark the current page, perform one of these steps:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>To add a bookmark to the Bookmarks menu, open the Bookmarks menu and
+    choose Bookmark This Page.</li>
+  <li>To add a bookmark to a specific folder on the Bookmarks menu, or to
+    provide a specific name or URL for your bookmark:
+    <ol>
+      <li>Open the Bookmarks menu and choose File Bookmark. Choose from any of
+        these options: 
+        <ul>
+          <li><strong>Name</strong>: Enter a name for the bookmark if you want
+            a different name.</li>
+          <li><strong>Location</strong>: Enter a URL for the bookmark if you
+            want a different URL.</li>
+          <li><strong>Keyword</strong>: Enter a keyword for the bookmark if you
+            want to be able to open the bookmarked page from the Location
+            Bar (see
+            <a href="nav_help.xhtml#custom_keywords">Using Custom Bookmark
+            Keywords</a>).</li>
+          <li><strong>Destination</strong>: Choose a folder in which to create
+            your bookmark.</li>
+          <li><strong>New Folder</strong>: Click this to create a new folder in
+            which to create your bookmark.</li>
+        </ul>
+      </li>
+      <li>Click OK to add the bookmark.</li>
+    </ol>
+  
+    <p><strong>Tip</strong>: If you have multiple browser tabs open in a
+      window, you can select <q>Bookmark this groups of tabs</q> to add a
+      single bookmark that will open all of the open tabs in the current
+      window.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>To add a bookmark to the Personal Toolbar, drag the bookmark icon
+    <img src="chrome://communicator/skin/bookmarks/bookmark-item.png"
+    alt="image of bookmark icon"/> next to the Location Bar to a place on
+    the Personal Toolbar. You can drag a bookmark to the following places:
+    <ul>
+      <li>In the Bookmarks folder on the Personal Toolbar.</li>
+      <li>In a bookmarks folder you&apos;ve created on the Personal
+        Toolbar.</li>
+      <li>To the Personal Toolbar itself, on the right side of all bookmarks
+        folders.
+        <p>For more information about adding bookmarks to the Personal Toolbar,
+          see <a href="#adding_personal_toolbar_bookmarks">Adding Personal
+          Toolbar bookmarks</a>.</p>
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<table summary="Image table">
+  <tr>
+    <td><img src="images/personalbar.png" alt="Personal Toolbar"/></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td><strong>Personal Toolbar</strong></td>
+  </tr>
+</table>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>To add a bookmark to the Bookmarks tab in Sidebar, open Sidebar, select
+    the Bookmarks tab, and drag the bookmark icon
+    <img src="chrome://communicator/skin/bookmarks/bookmark-item.png"
+    alt="image of bookmark icon"/> next to the Location Bar to a place on
+    the bookmark list in the Bookmarks tab.
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Notes</strong>:</p>
+<ul>
+  <li>The bookmark icon
+    <img src="chrome://communicator/skin/bookmarks/bookmark-item.png"
+    alt="image of bookmark icon"/> may appear as another page-specific
+    icon if you have checked Show Website Icons in preferences. See
+    <a href="cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml#appearance">Appearance Preferences -
+    Appearance</a> for more information on changing this preferences.</li>
+  <li>After adding a bookmark using any of the methods listed above, it can be
+    accessed using the Sidebar Bookmarks tab, the Manage Bookmarks window, and
+    the Bookmarks menu.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#bookmarks">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="organizing_your_bookmarks">Organizing Your Bookmarks</h3>
+
+<p>To organize your bookmarks, open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage
+  Bookmarks. Perform any of the following tasks in your Manage Bookmarks
+  window.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can open the Manage Bookmarks window from the
+  Bookmarks tab in Sidebar. Click on Manage at the top of the Bookmarks
+  tab.</p>
+
+<p>To view bookmarks inside of folders:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Double-click a folder to view its contents.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To move a bookmark or a folder to another location in the list:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Drag the bookmark or folder that you want to move to the new location. To
+    put a bookmark in a folder, drag it to the folder.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To create a new folder or separator:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click New Folder or New Separator at the top of the Bookmarks window. The
+    new folder or separator appears below the current selection.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To remove a bookmark or a folder from the list:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to highlight the bookmark or folder that you want to remove.</li>
+  <li>Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or click Delete in the Bookmarks
+    window.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To sort your bookmarks in the Manage Bookmarks window:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Select the folder you want to sort.</li>
+  <li>To sort bookmarks by Name, open the Edit menu and select Sort Folder by
+    Name.</li>
+  <li>To sort bookmarks in other ways, open the Edit menu and select Sort
+    Folder. In the dialog, choose how you want the list sorted.
+
+    <p><strong>Tip</strong>: To add more columns, open the View menu, open
+      <q>Show columns</q>, and select a column header in the list.</p></li>
+</ul>
+
+<h4>Designating a New Bookmark Folder</h4>
+
+<p>When you create a new bookmark, &brandShortName; normally adds it to the
+  bottom of your bookmarks list. If you prefer to file your bookmarks in a
+  folder, you can designate a new bookmarks folder.</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.</li>
+  <li>In your Bookmarks window, select a folder to hold new bookmarks.</li>
+  <li>Open the View menu and choose Set as New Bookmark Folder.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p> [<a href="#bookmarks">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="changing_individual_bookmarks">Changing Individual Bookmarks</h3>
+
+<p>You can change the information for any individual bookmark.</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.</li>
+  <li>In your Bookmarks window, click a bookmark.</li>
+  <li>Click Properties.</li>
+  <li>In the bookmark Properties dialog box window, click the Info tab.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>You can rename the bookmark (the name appears in your bookmark list),
+  add descriptive information, or set a 
+  <a href="nav_help.xhtml#custom_keywords">keyword</a>.</p>
+
+<p>You can also set &brandShortName; to check bookmarked websites for
+  changes.</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.</li>
+  <li>In your Bookmarks window, click a bookmark.</li>
+  <li>Click Properties.</li>
+  <li>Use the pull down lists and the textfield under <q>Check this location
+    for updates</q> to specify how often you want &brandShortName; to check the
+    bookmarked page for changes.</li>
+  <li>To be notified when the bookmarked page changes, choose from the options
+    in the <q>Notification</q> section.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p> [<a href="#bookmarks">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="searching_your_bookmarks">Searching Your Bookmarks</h3>
+
+<p>To search the bookmarks list:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.</li>
+  <li>In your Bookmarks window, open the Tools menu and choose Search
+    Bookmarks. You see the Find Bookmarks dialog box.</li>
+  <li>In the drop-down lists, choose options to define your search, and then
+    click Find. Bookmarks that match your search criteria are displayed. Choose
+    from the following Search options:
+    <ul>
+      <li>Choose "contains," "starts with," or "ends with" if you know only
+        part of the word or phrase for which you&apos;re searching.</li>
+      <li>Choose "is" if you know exactly what you&apos;re searching for.</li>
+      <li>Choose "is not" or "doesn&apos;t contain" to exclude pages.</li>
+      <li>Click the fill-in field and type all or part of name or URL
+        (web address) for the bookmarks or history listings that you want to
+        find or exclude.</li>
+      <li>Select <q>Save query in bookmarks</q> to save this search for
+        later use.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Double-click a bookmark in the list to go to that page.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: If the list is hard to read, try expanding the search
+  results window.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#bookmarks">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="exporting_or_importing_a_bookmark_list">Exporting or Importing a
+  Bookmark List</h3>
+
+<p>Your bookmarks are stored in a file named bookmarks.html. You can export a
+  copy of this file and save it in a folder of your choosing. You can then edit
+  it and treat it as you would any HTML file.</p>
+  
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.</li>
+  <li>In your Bookmarks window, open the Tools menu, and choose Export.</li>
+  <li>In the <q>Export Bookmarks File</q> dialog box, choose a folder.
+    Your bookmarks.html file will be copied into the folder you designate.</li>
+  <li>Click Save.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Your &brandShortName; bookmarks are not altered by this procedure.</p>
+
+<p>You can also import bookmarks from other sources. For example, you can
+  import bookmarks from earlier &brandShortName; versions, other browsers, or
+  from bookmarks files that your friends send you.</p>
+
+<p>Before you start, make sure that the bookmarks file you want to import is an
+  HTML file.</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.</li>
+  <li>In your Bookmarks window, open the Tools menu and choose Import.</li>
+  <li>In the dialog that appears, choose whether you want to import bookmarks
+    from earlier versions of &brandShortName;, or from a bookmarks file on your
+    computer.</li>
+  <li>Click Continue.</li>
+  <li>If you have chosen to import bookmarks from an earlier version of
+    &brandShortName;, select the profile you want to import bookmarks from,
+    then click Continue. If you have chosen to import bookmarks from a
+    file, navigate to and select the bookmarks file you want to import, then
+    click Open.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The imported bookmarks are treated as a group of new bookmarks and added to
+  the bottom of your bookmarks list. If you have designated a new bookmark
+  folder, the imported bookmarks are added to that folder.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Importing a bookmarks file imports the bookmarks and
+  folders from that file. It does not create two bookmarks files.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#bookmarks">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="add-ons">Add-ons</h2>
+
+<p>One of the most exciting ways to customize &brandShortName; is through the
+  addition of Add-ons. In this section, you will learn what Add-ons are, how
+  to install them, and how to use the Add-on Manager.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#about_add-ons">About Add-ons</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#installing_add-ons">Installing Add-ons</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#using_the_add-on_manager">Using the Add-on Manager</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="about_add-ons">About Add-ons</h3>
+
+<p>An Add-on is a piece of software that can be added to &brandShortName; to
+  change its appearance, behavior, or to add new features. It can also change
+  the language shown in the user interface. Add-ons can be classified in four
+  types:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Extensions</strong>: This type of Add-on either changes the way
+    &brandShortName; behaves or adds new features to it. For instance, there
+    are extensions that provide you with weather forecasts, that add a
+    full-featured FTP client, or that block advertisements in web pages. Some
+    extensions are designed to work only with specific websites.</li>
+  <li><strong>Themes</strong>: Themes change the appearance and design of
+    &brandShortName;, but don&apos;t add or change features. They act as a
+    skin. &brandShortName; ships with two themes, Default Theme and Modern
+    Theme, but you can add more to fit your style.</li>
+  <li><strong>Languages</strong>: While you can download &brandShortName; in
+    a number of languages, you may add additional languages to it in the form
+    of language packs. This way, different users may use &brandShortName; in
+    their own language without having to install the program for everyone.
+    This is specially useful if you are going to install &brandShortName; on a
+    computer that is shared by different users in, for example, a computer lab.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Language packs only change the user interface
+      language. Web pages, messages, newsgroup and news &amp; blog posts will
+      still be shown in the original language in which they were written.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Plugins</strong>: Plugins act as connectors between
+    &brandShortName; and other programs. They enable you to see special content
+    (like Flash movies, or Adobe PDF documents) directly inside the
+    &brandShortName; browser window, instead of opening the target program in a
+    separate window.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Add-ons always come as packages. Each Add-on is a single file with the XPI
+  extension, except in the case of plugins which usually are binaries specific
+  to the target operating system.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#add-ons">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="installing_add-ons">Installing Add-ons</h3>
+
+<p>There are a number of ways to install Add-ons:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>By clicking a link for an Add-on on a web page. This will trigger
+    a &brandShortName; dialog asking you to confirm or cancel the
+    installation, with the Install button disabled for some seconds in
+    order to avoid accidentally clicking it just as the dialog shows up.
+    
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: As an additonal security measure,
+      &brandShortName; only allows installing Add-ons from a list of permitted
+      websites in the <a
+      href="cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml#software_installation">Software
+      Installation preferences panel</a>.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>By opening a previously saved Add-on package, just like you open a
+    regular file that you previously saved on your hard drive: Select Open file
+    from the File menu, or press <span class="mac"><kbd>Cmd</kbd></span><span
+    class="noMac"><kbd>Ctrl</kbd></span>+<kbd>O</kbd>.</li>
+  <li>By using the Get Add-ons panel in the Add-on Manager or clicking the
+    Install button in any of the panels in the Add-on Manager.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Plugins are usually installed as a separate program
+  while &brandShortName; is closed so both the external program and the
+  corresponding plugin for &brandShortName; get installed correctly.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#add-ons">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="using_the_add-on_manager">Using the Add-on Manager</h3>
+
+<p>The Add-on Manager enables you to install and uninstall Add-ons, enable and
+  disable them and, in some cases, set preferences for them.</p>
+  
+<p id="accessing_the_add-on_manager">To access the Add-on Manager, follow any
+  of these steps:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Open the Tools menu, then select Add-on Manager.</li>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span><span
+    class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences, expand the Advanced
+    category and click Software Installation.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#the_get_add-ons_panel">The Get Add-ons panel</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#the_extensions_panel">The Extensions panel</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#the_themes_panel">The Themes panel</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#the_languages_panel">The Languages panel</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#the_plugins_panel">The Plugins panel</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h4 id="the_get_add-ons_panel">The Get Add-ons panel</h4>
+
+<p>The Get Add-ons panel in the Add-on Manager uses web services provided by
+  the Mozilla Add-ons website to present a list of recommended Add-ons, as
+  well as giving you the option to search all available Mozilla Add-ons
+  directly from the Add-on Manager. After
+  <a href="#accessing_the_add-on_manager">accessing the Add-on Manager</a>,
+  click the Get Add-ons button to show the Get Add-ons panel. There, you can
+  perform the following actions:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>To search for Add-ons based on name, description or tags, use the
+    Search box. Type a word or phrase and press <span
+    class="mac"><kbd>Return</kbd></span><span
+    class="noMac"><kbd>Enter</kbd></span>. You will get a list of matching
+    Add-ons. To clear the search box terms and the result list, click the
+    icon inside the search box.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Add-ons that are already installed or
+      incompatible with your current version of &brandShortName; will not be
+      displayed in the list of search results.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>To open the Mozilla Add-ons website in a new browser window (or a new
+    browser tab, depending on your preferences), click Browse All Add-ons.</li>
+  <li>To get more information about one of the recommended Add-ons in the list
+    displayed by default, click the entry. The entry will expand, displaying
+    a larger image, a full description of the Add-on, and an indication of the
+    Add-on type (extension, theme, etc.). You will also be able to install the
+    Add-on by clicking the Add to &brandShortName; button inside the
+    expanded entry.</li>
+  <li>To display the full list of recommended Add-ons for &brandShortName; in a
+    new browser window (or a new browser tab, depending on your preferences),
+    scroll down the recommended Add-ons list until you see the See All
+    Recommended Add-ons link.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#using_the_add-on_manager">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h4 id="the_extensions_panel">The Extensions panel</h4>
+
+<p>The Extensions panel in the Add-on Manager lists the installed extensions.
+  After <a href="#accessing_the_add-on_manager">accessing the Add-on
+  Manager</a>, click the Extensions button to show the Extensions panel. There,
+  you can perform the following actions:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>To get more information about any of the installed extensions, click the
+    entry in the list. The entry will expand and show the full description of
+    the extension.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Disabled extensions will appear greyed out.
+      Incompatible extensions will appear greyed out, since they are also
+      disabled, and with a forbidden sign over the extension icon (incompatible
+      extensions are those which define themselves as not compatible for the
+      version of &brandShortName; you are using).</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>To access preferences of an extension (if the extension features a
+    preferences panel), click the entry corresponding to the desired extension,
+    then click the Preferences button.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: If the extension does not feature a preferences
+      panel, the Preferences button will be disabled. You can&apos;t access
+      preferences of disabled or incompatible extensions.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>To disable an extension, click the entry corresponding to the desired
+    extension, then click the Disable button. An info bar will appear to remind
+    you that changes will apply once you restart &brandShortName;. The info bar
+    features a Restart &brandShortName; button.</li>
+  <li>To enable an extension, click the entry corresponding to the desired
+    extension, then click the Enable button. An info bar will appear to remind
+    you that changes will apply once you restart &brandShortName;. The info bar
+    features a Restart &brandShortName; button.</li>
+  <li>To uninstall an extension, click the entry corresponding to the
+    desired extension, then click the Uninstall button. An info bar will
+    appear to remind you that changes will apply once you restart
+    &brandShortName;. The info bar features a Restart &brandShortName;
+    button.</li>
+  <li>To find updates for any extension in the list (including those marked as
+    incompatible), click the Find Updates button at the bottom of the
+    Add-on Manager.
+
+    <p>If updates are found, they will be displayed in a new panel. In the
+      panel, you can choose what extensions you want to update and then use the
+      Install Updates button to retrieve updated Add-ons. Once downloaded, you
+      will need to restart &brandShortName; to apply the updates.</p>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#using_the_add-on_manager">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h4 id="the_themes_panel">The Themes panel</h4>
+
+<p>The Themes panel in the Add-on Manager lists the installed themes. After
+  <a href="#accessing_the_add-on_manager">accessing the Add-on Manager</a>,
+  click the Themes button to show the Themes panel. There, you can perform the
+  following actions:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>To get more information and a preview on any of the installed themes,
+    click an entry in the list. The entry will expand and show the full
+    description of the theme, along with a preview in the right side of the
+    Add-on Manager dialog (you may need to resize the dialog to properly see
+    the preview pane).</li>
+  <li>To use a theme, click the entry corresponding to the desired theme, then
+    click the Use Theme button. An info bar will appear to remind you that
+    changes will apply once you restart &brandShortName;. The info bar features
+    a Restart &brandShortName; button.
+    
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Contrary to extensions, you only can use one
+    theme at a time.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>To uninstall a theme, click the entry corresponding to the desired theme,
+    then click the Uninstall button. An info bar will appear to remind
+    you that changes will apply once you restart &brandShortName;. The info bar
+    features a Restart &brandShortName; button.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#using_the_add-on_manager">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h4 id="the_languages_panel">The Languages panel</h4>
+
+<p>The Languages panel in the Add-on Manager lists the installed Language
+  Packs. This panel only appears if you have installed a Language Pack.</p>
+
+<p>After <a href="#accessing_the_add-on_manager">accessing the Add-on
+  Manager</a>, click the Languages button to show the Languages panel. There,
+  you can perform the following actions:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>To disable a language pack, click the entry corresponding to the desired
+    language pack, then click the Disable button. An info bar will appear to
+    remind you that changes will apply once you restart &brandShortName;. The
+    info bar features a Restart &brandShortName; button.</li>
+  <li>To enable a language pack, click the entry corresponding to the desired
+    language pack, then click the Enable button. An info bar will appear to
+    remind you that changes will apply once you restart &brandShortName;. The
+    info bar features a Restart &brandShortName; button.</li>
+  <li>To uninstall a language pack, click the entry corresponding to the
+    desired language pack, then click the Uninstall button. An info bar will
+    appear to remind you that changes will apply once you restart
+    &brandShortName;. The info bar features a Restart &brandShortName;
+    button.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Enabling a language pack in the Language panel
+  doesn&apos;t change the language shown in &brandShortName;&apos;s user
+  interface, it only makes the language available for selection in the
+  <a href="cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml#appearance">Appearance Preferences
+  panel</a>.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#using_the_add-on_manager">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h4 id="the_plugins_panel">The Plugins panel</h4>
+
+<p>The Plugins panel in the Add-on Manager lists the installed Add-ons of type
+  Plugin. After <a href="#accessing_the_add-on_manager">accessing the Add-on
+  Manager</a>, click the Plugins button to show the Plugins panel. There, you
+  can perform the following actions:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>To disable a plugin, click the entry corresponding to the desired plugin,
+    then click the Disable button.</li>
+  <li>To enable a plugin, click the entry corresponding to the desired plugin,
+    then click the Enable button.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Contrary to other types of Add-ons, enabling and
+  disabling plugins doesn&apos;t require restarting &brandShortName;.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#using_the_add-on_manager">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="specifying_how_mozilla_starts_up">Specifying How &brandShortName;
+  Starts Up</h2>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#specifying_a_starting_page">Specifying a Starting Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#session_restore">Session Restore</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#changing_your_home_page">Changing Your Home Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#specifying_which_components_open_at_launch">Specifying Which
+      Components Open at Launch</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="specifying_a_starting_page">Specifying a Starting Page</h3>
+
+<p>You can specify the page that loads when the browser starts:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under "Display on Browser Startup" choose whether you want a
+    blank page, your home page, or the last web page visited to open
+    automatically when you launch your browser. Alternatively you can
+    tell &brandShortName; to restore the previous session, i.e. the
+    windows and tabs you had open when you last exited &brandShortName;.
+  <p><strong>Note</strong>: If you selected Home Page, type the URL in the
+    Location Bar.</p></li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#specifying_how_mozilla_starts_up">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="session_restore">Session Restore</h3>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; periodically saves your browsing session (open windows
+  and tabs, including form data) to disk. When you start &brandShortName; with
+  Session Restore enabled, the windows and tabs from your previous session
+  will be restored. This is especially useful if your previous browsing session
+  ended unexpectedly (e.g. your computer crashed or a website you visited forced
+  &brandShortName; to terminate). &brandShortName; will automatically restore
+  the previous session if "Restore Previous Session" under "Display on Browser
+  Startup" has been selected. If you chose to not be warned when you close a
+  browser window with multiple tabs open (see <a href="#tabbed_browsing">Tabbed
+  Browsing</a> preference panel), &brandShortName; will open a page from
+  where you can choose which windows/tabs from the previous session you want to
+  restore. The same will happen if &brandShortName; crashes repeatedly.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#specifying_how_mozilla_starts_up">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="changing_your_home_page">Changing Your Home Page</h3>
+
+<p>Your home page is the page that opens when you click the Home button in the
+  Personal Toolbar. Depending on how your preferences are set, it may also be
+  the page that opens automatically when you launch &brandShortName;.</p>
+
+<p>To specify your home page:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Click the Browser category.</li>
+  <li>In the Home page section, perform one of the following:
+    <ul>
+      <li>Type your home page&apos;s URL (web address) in the Location
+        field.</li>
+      <li>Click Use Current Page to make the page currently displayed in the
+        browser window your home page.</li>
+      <li>Click Choose File to select a file from your computer&apos;s hard
+        drive.</li>
+   </ul>
+ </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To specify your home page quickly, drag the bookmark
+  icon <img src="chrome://communicator/skin/bookmarks/bookmark-item.png"
+  alt="image of bookmark icon"/> from the Location Bar to the Home Page
+  button on the Personal Toolbar.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#specifying_how_mozilla_starts_up">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="specifying_which_components_open_at_launch">Specifying Which Components
+  Open at Launch</h3>
+
+<p>You can choose components (such as Mail &amp; Newsgroups and Composer) to
+  launch when you start &brandShortName;:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Click the Appearance category.</li>
+  <li>Select the components you want opened automatically each time you start
+    &brandShortName;.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#specifying_how_mozilla_starts_up">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+</body>
+</html>
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/developer_tools.xhtml
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>&brandShortName; Tools and Development</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<h1 id="web_development_tools">Web Development Tools</h1>
+
+<p>For web developers, &brandShortName; provides several tools to aid in
+  developing and debugging Web applications. Some of these are optional
+  installs. To access these tools, open the Tools menu and choose Web
+  Development.</p>
+
+<ul class="separate">
+  <li id="js_console">
+    <strong>Error Console</strong>: a console window that reports problems
+    with <a href="glossary.xhtml#javascript">JavaScript</a> and CSS code in
+    Web applications and the &brandShortName; application itself. By default, 
+    CSS parsing errors and JavaScript errors are displayed. The console can 
+    also be used to display logged messages from <a href="glossary.xhtml#xul">
+    XUL</a> and JavaScript code.
+  </li>
+  <li id="inspector">
+    <strong>DOM Inspector</strong>: a tool that can be
+    used to inspect and edit the DOM of any web document or XUL
+    application.
+
+    <p>Online resources:</p>
+    
+    <ul>
+      <li><a href="http://www.brownhen.com/DI/">Introduction to the DOM
+        Inspector</a> (Ian Oeschger)</li>
+      <li><a href="http://www.mozilla.org/projects/inspector/faq.html">DOM
+        Inspector FAQ</a> (mozilla.org)</li>
+      <!-- 2006-01-27: Removed link (404).
+      <li><a href="http://gr.ayre.st/moz/evangelism/tutorials/dominspectortutorial.shtml">grayrest&apos;s
+        Guide to the DOM Inspector</a></li>
+      -->
+      <li>Creating Applications with Mozilla - Appendix B3:
+        <a href="http://books.mozdev.org/html/mozilla-app-b-sect-3.html">The
+        DOM Inspector</a></li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li id="venkman">
+    <strong>JavaScript Debugger</strong>: also known as Venkman, this utility
+    allows you to debug JavaScript in &brandShortName;. It supports stepping,
+    breakpoints and many other features.
+
+    <p>Online resources:</p>
+
+    <ul>
+      <li><a href="http://www.mozilla.org/projects/venkman/">Venkman JavaScript
+        Debugger Homepage</a></li>
+      <li><a href="http://www.svendtofte.com/code/learning_venkman/">Learning
+        the JavaScript debugger Venkman</a> (Svend Tofte)</li>
+      <li><a href="http://www.webreference.com/programming/javascript/venkman/">Debugging
+        JavaScript Using Venkman</a> (webreference.com, article series)</li>
+      <li><a href="http://www.hacksrus.com/~ginda/venkman/">Venkman Development
+        Homepage</a></li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+</body>
+</html>
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/forieusers.xhtml
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>For Microsoft Internet Explorer Users</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<h1 id="for_internet_explorer_users">For Internet Explorer Users</h1>
+
+<p>If you&apos;ve been using Microsoft&reg; Internet Explorer, you&apos;ll find
+  that it&apos;s easy to begin using &brandShortName; for
+  <a href="nav_help.xhtml#browsing_the_web">browsing the web</a>,
+  <a href="mailnews_getting_started.xhtml">managing your mail</a>, and much
+  more.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#mozilla_and_internet_explorer_terminology_differences">&brandShortName;
+      and Internet Explorer Terminology Differences</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#about_your_ie_favorites">About Your IE Favorites</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#browser_features">Browser Features</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#other_features">Other Features</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#keyboard_shortcuts">Keyboard Shortcuts</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="mozilla_and_internet_explorer_terminology_differences">&brandShortName;
+  and Internet Explorer Terminology Differences</h2>
+
+<table class="defaultTable">
+  <thead>
+    <tr>
+      <th>Internet Explorer</th>
+      <th>&brandShortName;</th>
+    </tr>
+  </thead>
+  <tbody class="tbody-default">
+    <tr>
+      <td>Internet Options</td>
+      <td><a href="cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml">Preferences</a></td>
+    </tr>
+    <tr>
+      <td>Temporary Internet Files</td>
+      <td><a href="nav_help.xhtml#changing_cache_settings">Cache</a></td>
+    </tr>
+    <tr>
+      <td>Favorites</td>
+      <td><a href="customize_help.xhtml#bookmarks">Bookmarks</a></td>
+    </tr>
+    <tr>
+      <td>Address Bar</td>
+      <td><a href="nav_help.xhtml#moving_to_another_page">Location Bar</a></td>
+    </tr>
+    <tr>
+      <td>Refresh</td>
+      <td><a href="nav_help.xhtml#stopping_and_reloading">Reload</a></td>
+    </tr>
+    <tr>
+      <td>Links Bar</td>
+      <td><a href="customize_help.xhtml#personal_toolbar">Personal Toolbar</a></td>
+    </tr>
+    <tr>
+      <td>Copy Shortcut</td>
+      <td>Copy Link Location</td>
+    </tr>
+  </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<h2 id="about_your_ie_favorites">About Your IE Favorites</h2>
+
+<p>Your IE Favorites are imported automatically. To access them, open the
+  Bookmarks menu and choose Imported IE Favorites.</p>
+
+<h2 id="browser_features">Browser Features</h2>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong><a href="nav_help.xhtml#using_tabbed_browsing">Tabbed
+    Browsing</a></strong>: Instead of opening a separate browser window for
+    each website you want to visit, you can open multiple websites within the
+    same window and tab between them. You can also
+    <a href="cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml#navigator">set a group of tabs as
+    your home page</a>.</li>
+  <li><strong><a href="cs_priv_prefs_popup.xhtml">Pop-up Window
+    Controls</a></strong>: Lets you allow or suppress both popup and popunder
+    windows.</li>
+  <li><strong><a href="customize_help.xhtml#sidebar">Sidebar</a></strong>:
+    Customize &brandShortName; with frequently accessed content and tools such
+    as news, stock quotes, your bookmarks, browser history, and many other
+    options.</li>
+  <li><strong><a href="profiles_help.xhtml#managing_profiles">Profile
+    Manager</a></strong>: Create different profiles, each with its own
+    bookmarks, preferences, mail settings, and so on. This is useful if you
+    must share &brandShortName; on the same computer with other people, or
+    if you want to keep your work and personal settings separate.</li>
+  <li><strong><a href="using_priv_help.xhtml">Cookie Manager</a></strong>: Lets
+    you view detailed information about each cookie and remove cookies you
+    don&apos;t want to be stored on your computer. You can also control which
+    websites are allowed to store cookies on your computer.</li>
+  <li><strong><a href="using_priv_help.xhtml#managing_images">Image
+    Manager</a></strong>: Enables you to disable images from certain websites,
+    or disable them all together. This is useful if you wish to decrease the
+    amount of time it takes for websites to load.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h2 id="other_features">Other Features</h2>
+
+<p>In the lower left-hand corner of your browser, a component bar gives you
+  quick access to several useful features:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong><a href="mailnews_getting_started.xhtml">Mail &amp;
+    Newsgroups</a></strong>: Conveniently manage all your Internet
+    communications. You can set up and maintain multiple  business and personal
+    mail accounts and Internet newsgroups, all from one window. You can
+    <a href="mailnews_getting_started.xhtml#importing_mail_from_other_programs">import</a>
+    mail and settings from other popular email programs.</li>
+  <li><strong><a href="mailnews_addressbooks.xhtml#using_address_books">Address
+    Books</a></strong>: Create an address book or
+    <a href="mailnews_addressbooks.xhtml#importing_address_books">import</a>
+    contact information from other popular mail programs.</li>
+  <li><strong><a href="composer_help.xhtml">Composer</a></strong>:
+    Create, edit, and publish your pages on the web with this built-in web page
+    editor.</li>
+  <li><strong>ChatZilla</strong>: Built-in IRC client that lets you chat with
+    other people over IRC networks.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h2 id="keyboard_shortcuts">Keyboard Shortcuts</h2>
+
+<p>You will notice that Microsoft Internet Explorer and &brandShortName;
+  share many of the same shortcut keys. For a full list of shortcut keys, see
+  the List of <a href="shortcuts.xhtml">&brandShortName; Keyboard
+  Shortcuts</a>.</p>
+
+</body>
+</html>
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/glossary.xhtml
@@ -0,0 +1,788 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>Glossary</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<div class="boilerPlate">This glossary is provided for your information only,
+  and is not meant to be relied upon as a complete or authoritative description
+  of the terms defined below or of the privacy and/or security ramifications of
+  the technologies described.</div>
+
+<h1 id="glossary">Glossary</h1>
+
+<dl>
+
+<dt id="add-on">add-on</dt><dd>A piece of software that can be added to
+  &brandShortName; to change its appearance, behavior, or to add new features.
+  It can also change the language shown in the user interface. See also
+  <a href="#extension">extension</a>, <a href="#language_pack">language
+  pack</a>, <a href="#plugin">plugin</a>, and <a href="#theme">theme</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="authentication">authentication</dt><dd>The use of a password,
+  certificate, personal identification number (PIN), or other information to
+  validate an identity over a computer network. See also
+  <a href="#password-based_authentication">password-based authentication</a>,
+  <a href="#certificate-based_authentication">certificate-based
+  authentication</a>, <a href="#client_authentication">client
+  authentication</a>, <a href="#server_authentication">server
+  authentication</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="bookmark">bookmark</dt><dd>A stored <a href="#web_page">web page</a>
+  address (<a href="#url">URL</a>) that you can go to easily by clicking a
+  bookmark icon in the <a href="#personal_toolbar">Personal Toolbar</a> or
+  choosing the bookmark&apos;s name from the Bookmarks menu.</dd>
+
+<dt id="ca">CA</dt><dd>See <a href="#certificate_authority">certificate
+  authority (CA)</a></dd>
+
+<dt id="ca_certificate">CA certificate</dt><dd>A certificate that
+  identifies a certificate authority. See also
+  <a href="#certificate_authority">certificate authority (CA)</a>,
+  <a href="#subordinate_ca">subordinate CA</a>, <a href="#root_ca">root
+  CA</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="cache">cache</dt><dd>A collection of web page copies stored
+  on your computer&apos;s hard disk or in its random-access memory (RAM). The
+  browser accumulates these copies as you browse the Web. When you click a link
+  or type a <a href="#url">URL</a> to fetch a particular web page for which the
+  cache already contains a copy, the browser compares the cached copy to the
+  original. If there have been no changes, the browser uses the cached copy
+  rather than refetching the original, saving processing and download
+  time.</dd>
+
+<dt id="caret_browsing">caret browsing</dt><dd>A &brandShortName; feature that
+  allows you to navigate through text in Web pages and e-mail messages (or this
+  Help window) with a caret. Using your keyboard, you can navigate and select
+  text like you do in a text editor. You can turn caret browsing mode on or off
+  by pressing the <kbd>F7</kbd> key. Caret browsing mode can also be enabled or
+  disabled in Advanced Preferences - Keyboard Navigation.</dd>
+
+<dt id="certificate">certificate</dt><dd>The digital equivalent of an ID card.
+  A certificate specifies the name of an individual, company, or other entity
+  and certifies that a public key, which is included in the certificate,
+  belongs to that entity. When you digitally sign a message or other data, the
+  digital signature for that message is created with the aid of the private key
+  that corresponds to the public key in your certificate. A certificate is
+  issued and digitally signed by a <a href="#certificate_authority">certificate
+  authority (CA)</a>. A certificate&apos;s validity can be verified by checking
+  the CA&apos;s <a href="#digital_signature">digital signature</a>. Also called
+  digital ID, digital passport, public-key certificate, X.509 certificate, and
+  security certificate. See also <a href="#public-key_cryptography">public-key
+  cryptography</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="certificate_authority">certificate authority (CA)</dt><dd>A service
+  that issues a certificate after verifying the identity of the person or
+  entity the certificate is intended to identify. A CA also renews and revokes
+  certificates and generates a list of revoked certificates at regular
+  intervals. CAs can be independent vendors or a person or organization using
+  certificate-issuing server software (such as &brandShortName; Certificate
+  Management System). See also <a href="#certificate">certificate</a>,
+  <a href="#crl">CRL (certificate revocation list)</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="certificate_backup_password">certificate backup password</dt><dd>A
+  password that protects a certificate that you are backing up or have
+  previously backed up. Certificate Manager asks you to set this password when
+  you back up a certificate, and requests it when you attempt to restore a
+  certificate that has previously been backed up.</dd>
+
+<dt id="certificate-based_authentication">certificate-based
+  authentication</dt><dd>Verification of identity based on certificates and
+  public-key cryptography. See also
+  <a href="#password-based_authentication">password-based
+  authentication</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="certificate_chain">certificate chain</dt><dd>A hierarchical series of
+  certificates signed by successive certificate authorities. A CA certificate
+  identifies a <a href="#certificate_authority">certificate authority (CA)</a>
+  and is used to sign certificates issued by that authority. A CA certificate
+  can in turn be signed by the CA certificate of a parent CA and so on up to a
+  <a href="#root_ca">root CA</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="certificate_fingerprint">certificate fingerprint</dt><dd>
+  A unique number associated with a certificate. The number is not part of
+  the certificate itself but is produced by applying a mathematical function to
+  the contents of the certificate. If the contents of the certificate change,
+  even by a single character, the function produces a different number.
+  Certificate fingerprints can therefore be used to verify that certificates
+  have not been tampered with.</dd>
+
+<dt id="certificate_manager">Certificate
+  Manager</dt><dd>The part of the browser that allows you to view and manage
+  certificates. To view the main Certificate Manager window: Open the
+  <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span> <span class="noMac">Edit</span>
+  menu, choose Preferences, click Privacy and Security, and then click Manage
+  Certificates.</dd>
+
+<dt id="certificate_renewal">certificate renewal</dt><dd>The process of
+  renewing a <a href="#certificate">certificate</a> that is about to
+  expire.</dd>
+
+<dt id="certificate_verification">certificate verification</dt><dd>When
+  <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate Manager</a> verifies a
+  certificate, it confirms that the digital signature was created by a CA whose
+  own CA certificate is both on file with Certificate Manager and marked as
+  trusted for issuing that kind of certificate. It also confirms that the
+  certificate being verified has not itself been marked as untrusted. Finally,
+  if the <a href="#ocsp">OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol)</a> has been
+  activated, Certificate Manager also performs an online check. It does so by
+  looking up the certificate in a list of valid certificates maintained at a
+  <a href="#url">URL</a> that is specified either in the certificate itself or
+  in the browser&apos;s Validation preferences. If any of these checks fail,
+  Certificate Manager marks the certificate as unverified and won&apos;t
+  recognize the identity it certifies.</dd>
+
+<dt id="cipher">cipher</dt><dd>See
+  <a href="#cryptographic_algorithm">cryptographic algorithm</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="client">client</dt><dd>Software (such as browser software) that sends
+  requests to and receives information from a <a href="#server">server</a>,
+  which is usually running on a different computer. A computer on which client
+  software runs is also described as a client.</dd>
+
+<dt id="client_authentication">client authentication</dt><dd>The process of
+  identifying a <a href="#client">client</a> to a <a href="#server">server</a>,
+  for example with a name and password or with a
+  <a href="#client_ssl_certificate">client SSL certificate</a> and some
+  digitally signed data. See also <a href="#ssl">SSL (Secure
+  Sockets Layer)</a>, <a href="#server_authentication">server
+  authentication</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="client_ssl_certificate">client SSL certificate</dt><dd>A certificate
+  that a <a href="#client">client</a> (such as browser software) presents to a
+  <a href="#server">server</a> to authenticate the identity of the client
+  (or the identity of the person using the client) using the
+  <a href="#ssl">SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)</a> protocol. See
+  also <a href="#client_authentication">client authentication</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="component_bar">Component Bar</dt><dd>The toolbar located at the bottom
+  left of any &brandShortName; window. The Component Bar allows you to switch
+  between &brandShortName; components by clicking icons for Browser,
+  Mail &amp; Newsgroups, Composer, and so on.</dd>
+
+<dt id="cookie">cookie</dt><dd>A small bit of information stored on your
+  computer by some <a href="#web_site">websites</a>. When you visit such a
+  website, the website asks your browser to place one or more cookies on your
+  hard disk. Later, when you return to the website, your browser sends the
+  website the cookies that belong to it. Cookies help websites keep track of
+  information about you, such as the contents of your shopping cart. You can set
+  your cookie preferences to control how cookies are used and how much
+  information you are willing to let websites store on them. See also
+  <a href="#foreign_cookie">foreign cookie</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="cookie_manager">Cookie Manager</dt><dd>The part of the browser
+  that you can use to control <a href="#cookie">cookies</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="crl">CRL (certificate revocation list)</dt><dd>A list of revoked
+  certificates that is generated and signed by a
+  <a href="#certificate_authority">certificate authority (CA)</a>. You can
+  download the latest CRL to your browser or to a server, then check against it
+  to make sure that certificates are still valid before permitting their use
+  for authentication.</dd>
+
+<dt id="cryptographic_algorithm">cryptographic algorithm</dt><dd>A set of
+  rules or directions used to perform cryptographic operations such as
+  <a href="#encryption">encryption</a> and
+  <a href="#decryption">decryption</a>. Sometimes called a
+  <em>cipher.</em></dd>
+
+<dt id="cryptography">cryptography</dt><dd>The art and practice of scrambling
+  (encrypting) and unscrambling (decrypting) information. For example,
+  cryptographic techniques are used to scramble an unscramble information
+  flowing between commercial websites and your browser. See also
+  <a href="#public-key_cryptography">public-key cryptography</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="decryption">decryption</dt><dd>The process of unscrambling data that
+  has been encrypted. See also <a href="#encryption">encryption</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="digital_id">digital ID</dt><dd>
+  See <a href="#certificate">certificate</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="digital_signature">digital signature</dt><dd>A code created from both
+  the data to be signed and the private key of the signer. This code is unique
+  for each new piece of data. Even a single comma added to a message changes
+  the digital signature for that message. Successful validation of your digital
+  signature by appropriate software not only provides evidence that you
+  approved the transaction or message, but also provides evidence that the data
+  has not changed since you digitally signed it. A digital signature has
+  nothing to do with a handwritten signature, although it can sometimes be used
+  for similar legal purposes. See also
+  <a href="#nonrepudiation">nonrepudiation</a>,
+  <a href="#tamper_detection">tamper detection</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="distinguished_name">distinguished name (DN)</dt><dd>A specially
+  formatted name that uniquely identifies the subject of a
+  <a href="#certificate">certificate</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="dual_key_pairs">dual key pairs</dt><dd>Two public-private key
+  pairs&mdash;four keys altogether&mdash;corresponding to two separate
+  certificates. The private key of one pair is used for signing operations, and
+  the public and private keys of the other pair are used for encryption and
+  decryption operations. Each pair corresponds to a separate
+  <a href="#certificate">certificate</a>. See also
+  <a href="#public-key_cryptography">public-key cryptography</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="eavesdropping">eavesdropping</dt><dd>Surreptitious interception of
+  information sent over a network by an entity for which the information is not
+  intended.</dd>
+
+<dt id="encryption">encryption</dt><dd>The process of scrambling information in
+  a way that disguises its meaning. For example, encrypted connections between
+  computers make it very difficult for third-parties to unscramble, or
+  <em>decrypt</em>, information flowing over the connection. Encrypted
+  information can be decrypted only by someone who possesses the appropriate
+  key. See also <a href="#public-key_cryptography">public-key
+  cryptography</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="encryption_certificate">encryption certificate</dt><dd>A
+  <a href="#certificate">certificate</a> whose public key is used for
+  encryption only. Encryption certificates are not used for signing operations.
+  See also <a href="#dual_key_pairs">dual key pairs</a>,
+  <a href="#signing_certificate">signing certificate</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="encryption_key">encryption key</dt><dd>A private key used for
+  encryption only. An encryption key and its equivalent private key, plus a
+  <a href="#signing_key">signing key</a> and its equivalent public key,
+  constitute a <a href="#dual_key_pairs">dual key pairs</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="extension">extension</dt><dd>A type of <a href="#add-on">add-on</a>
+  that changes the behavior of &brandShortName; or adds new features to
+  it.</dd>
+
+<dt id="feed">feed</dt><dd>A frequently updated source of references to web
+  pages, usually blog articles or news. Technically it is an XML document
+  available through a public well-known URL, comprising of several items inside,
+  each one containing some metadata (possibly including a summary) and an URL
+  to the full blog or news article. The XML document is regenerated at fixed
+  intervals, or whenever a new article is published to the website. Web
+  applications can subscribe to the URL serving the feed and present the new
+  articles as they are updated in the underlying XML document. There are
+  specific XML formats for feeds, most common of which are
+  <a href="#rss">RSS</a> and Atom.</dd>
+
+<dt id="fingerprint">fingerprint</dt><dd>See
+  <a href="#certificate_fingerprint">certificate fingerprint</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="fips_pubs_140-1">FIPS PUBS 140-1</dt><dd>Federal Information Processing
+  Standards Publications (FIPS PUBS) 140-1 is a US government standard for
+  implementations of cryptographic modules&mdash;that is, hardware or software
+  that encrypts and decrypts data or performs other cryptographic operations
+  (such as creating or verifying digital signatures). Many products sold to the
+  US government must comply with one or more of the FIPS standards.</dd>
+
+<dt id="foreign_cookie">foreign cookie</dt><dd>A <a href="#cookie">cookie</a>
+  from one website that gets stored on your computer when you visit a different
+  website. Sometimes a <a href="#web_site">website</a> displays content that is
+  hosted on another website. That content can be anything from an image to text
+  or an advertisement. The second website that hosts such elements also has the
+  ability to store a cookie in your browser, even though you don&apos;t visit
+  it directly. Also known as <q>third-party cookie</q>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="frame">frame</dt><dd>Frames are <a href="#web_page">web pages</a>
+  contained inside of an all-encompasssing <q>meta</q> page.</dd>
+
+<dt id="ftp">FTP (File Transfer Protocol)</dt><dd>A
+  standard that allows users to transfer files from one computer to another
+  over a network. You can use your browser to fetch files using FTP.</dd>
+
+<dt id="helper_application">helper application</dt><dd>Any application that is
+  used to open or view a file downloaded by the browser. A
+  <a href="#plugin">plugin</a> is a special kind of helper application that
+  installs itself into the Plugins directory of the main browser installation
+  directory and can typically be opened within the browser itself (internally).
+  Microsoft Word, Adobe Photoshop, and other external applications are
+  considered helper applications but not plugins, since they don&apos;t
+  install themselves into the browser directory, but can be opened from the
+  download dialog box.</dd>
+
+<dt id="home_page">home page</dt><dd>The page your browser is set to display
+  every time you launch it or when you click the Home button. Also used to
+  refer to the main page for a website, from which you can explore the rest of
+  the website.</dd>
+
+<dt id="html">HTML (HyperText Markup Language)</dt><dd>The document format used
+  for web pages. The HTML standard defines tags, or codes, used to define the
+  text layout, fonts, style, images, and other elements that make up a web
+  page.</dd>
+
+<dt id="http">HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol)</dt><dd>The protocol used to
+  transfer <a href="#web_page">web pages</a> (HyperText documents) between
+  browsers and <a href="#server">servers</a> over the
+  <a href="#world_wide_web">World Wide Web</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="https">HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure)</dt><dd>The secure
+  version of the HTTP protocol that uses <a href="#ssl">SSL</a> to ensure the
+  privacy of customer data (such as credit card information) while en route
+  over the <a href="#internet">Internet</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="imap">IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol)</dt><dd>A standard mail
+  server protocol that allows you to store all your messages and any changes to
+  them on the server rather than on your computer&apos;s hard disk. Using IMAP
+  rather than <a href="#pop">POP</a> saves disk space and allows you to access
+  your entire mailbox, including sent mail, drafts, and custom folders, from
+  any location. Using an IMAP server over a modem is generally faster than
+  using a POP mail server, since you initially download message headers only.
+  Not all <a href="#isp">ISPs</a> support IMAP.</dd>
+
+<dt id="implicit_consent">implicit consent</dt><dd>Also known as implied or
+  <q>opt-out</q> consent. Used to describe privacy settings that may allow
+  websites to gather information about you (for example by means of
+  <a href="#cookie">cookies</a> and online forms) unless you explicitly choose
+  to withhold your consent by selecting an option on a page that the website
+  provides for that purpose. Your consent may not be requested when the
+  information is actually gathered.</dd>
+
+<dt id="internet">Internet</dt><dd>A worldwide network of millions of computers
+  that communicate with each other using standard protocols such as
+  <a href="#tcp_ip">TCP/IP</a>. Originally developed for the US military in
+  1969, the Internet grew to include educational and research institutions and,
+  in the late 1990s, millions of businesses, organizations, and individuals.
+  Today the Internet is used for email, browsing the
+  <a href="#world_wide_web">World Wide Web (WWW)</a>, instant messaging,
+  usegroups, and many other purposes.</dd>
+
+<dt id="ip_address">IP address (Internet protocol address)</dt><dd>The address
+  of a computer on a <a href="#tcp_ip">TCP/IP</a> network. Every computer on
+  the <a href="#internet">Internet</a> has an IP address.
+  <a href="#client">Clients</a> have either a permanent IP address or one that
+  is dynamically assigned to them each time they connect with the network. IP
+  addresses are written as four sets of numbers, like this: 204.171.64.2.</dd>
+
+<dt id="irc">IRC (Internet Relay Chat)</dt><dd>A protocol used to chat with
+  other people in real-time using an IRC <a href="#client">client</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="isp">ISP (Internet Service Provider)</dt><dd>A company/institution
+  that provides <a href="#internet">Internet</a> connections.</dd>
+
+<dt id="java">Java</dt><dd>A programming language developed by Sun
+  Microsystems. A single Java program can run on many different kinds of
+  computers, thus avoiding the need for programmers to create a separate
+  version of each program for each kind of computer. Your browser can
+  automatically download and run Java programs (also called applets).</dd>
+
+<dt id="javascript">JavaScript</dt><dd>A scripting language commonly used to
+  construct <a href="#web_page">web pages</a>. Programmers use JavaScript to
+  make web pages more interactive; for example, to display forms and buttons.
+  JavaScript can be used with <a href="#java">Java</a>, but is technically a
+  separate language. Java is not required for JavaScript to work
+  correctly.</dd>
+
+<dt id="key">key</dt><dd>A large number used by a
+  <a href="#cryptographic_algorithm">cryptographic algorithm</a> to encrypt or
+  decrypt data. A person&apos;s public key, for example, allows other people to
+  encrypt messages to that person. The encrypted messages must be decrypted
+  with the corresponding private key. See also
+  <a href="#public-key_cryptography">public-key cryptography</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="language_pack">language pack</dt><dd>A type of
+  <a href="#add-on">add-on</a> that adds a new language to the user interface
+  of &brandShortName;.</dd>
+
+<dt id="ldap">LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)</dt><dd>A standard
+  protocol for accessing directory services, such as corporate address books,
+  across multiple platforms. You can set up your browser to access LDAP
+  directories from the Address Book. You can also set up Mail &amp; Newsgroups
+  to use an LDAP directory for email address autocompletion.</dd>
+
+<dt id="location_bar">Location Bar</dt><dd>The field (and associated buttons)
+  near the top of a browser window where you can type a
+  <a href="#url">URL</a> or search terms.</dd>
+
+<dt id="master_key">master key</dt><dd>A symmetric key used by
+  <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate Manager</a> to encrypt
+  information. For example, <a href="#password_manager">Password Manager</a>
+  uses Certificate Manager and your master key to encrypt email passwords,
+  website passwords, and other stored sensitive information. See also
+  <a href="#symmetric_encryption">symmetric encryption</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="master_password">master password</dt><dd>A password used by
+  Certificate Manager to protect the master key and/or private keys stored on a
+  <a href="#security_device">security device</a>. Certificate Manager needs to
+  access your private keys, for example, when you sign email messages or use
+  one of your own certificates to identify yourself to a website. It needs to
+  access your master key when Password Manager or Form Manager reads or adds to
+  your personal information. You can set or change your master password from
+  the Master Passwords preferences panel. Each security device requires a
+  separate master password. See also <a href="#private_key">private key</a>,
+  <a href="#master_key">master key</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="misrepresentation">misrepresentation</dt><dd>Presentation of an entity
+  as a person or organization that it is not. For example, a website might
+  pretend to be a furniture store when it is really just a website that takes
+  credit card payments but never sends any goods. See also
+  <a href="#spoofing">spoofing</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="navigation_toolbar">Navigation Toolbar</dt><dd>The toolbar near the top
+  of the browser window that includes the Back and Forward buttons.</dd>
+
+<dt id="nonrepudiation">nonrepudiation</dt><dd>The inability, of the sender of
+  a message, to deny having sent the message. A regular hand-written signature
+  provides one form of nonrepudiation. A
+  <a href="#digital_signature">digital signature</a> provides another.</dd>
+
+<dt id="notification_bar">notification bar</dt><dd>A bar that appears at the
+  top of the content area to inform you about something that needs your
+  attention, e.g. when the Password Manager can save a password for you, a
+  popup has been blocked or an additional plugin is required.</dd>
+
+<dt id="object_signing">object signing</dt><dd>A technology that allows
+  software developers to sign Java code, JavaScript scripts, or any kind of
+  file, and that allows users to identify the signers and control access by
+  signed code to local system resources.</dd>
+
+<dt id="object-signing_certificate">object-signing certificate</dt><dd>A
+  certificate whose corresponding private key is used to sign objects such as
+  code files. See also <a href="#object_signing">object signing</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="ocsp">OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol)</dt><dd>A set of rules
+  that <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate Manager</a> follows to
+  perform an online check of a certificate&apos;s validity each time the
+  certificate is used. This process involves checking the certificate against a
+  list of valid certificates maintained at a specified website. Your computer
+  must be online for OCSP to work.</dd>
+
+<dt id="opml">OPML (Outline Processor Markup Language)</dt><dd>An XML format
+  used to list <a href="#feed">feed</a> collections. Although broader in its
+  specification, it is mainly used nowadays to export and import feed
+  collections between different feed aggregators or readers, like
+  &brandShortName;.</dd>
+
+<dt id="password-based_authentication">password-based
+  authentication</dt><dd>Confident identification by means of a name and
+  password. See also <a href="#authentication">authentication</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="password_manager">Password Manager</dt><dd>The part of the
+  browser that can help you remember some or all of your names and passwords by
+  storing them on your computer&apos;s hard disk, and entering them for you
+  automatically when you visit such websites.</dd>
+
+<dt id="personal_toolbar">Personal Toolbar</dt><dd>The customizable toolbar
+  that appears just below the location bar by default in the browser. It
+  contains standard buttons such as Home, Bookmarks, and so on that you can add
+  or remove. You can also add buttons for your favorite bookmarks, or folders
+  containing groups of bookmarks.</dd>
+
+<dt id="phishing">Phishing</dt><dd>Phishing is a fraudulent business scheme in
+  which a party creates counterfeit websites, hijacking brand names of banks,
+  e-retailers and credit card companies, trying to collect victims&apos;
+  personal information.</dd>
+
+<dt id="pkcs_11">PKCS #11</dt><dd>The public-key cryptography standard that
+  governs security devices such as smart cards. See also
+  <a href="#security_device">security device</a>, <a href="#smart_card">smart
+  card</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="pkcs_11_module">PKCS #11 module</dt><dd>A program on your computer
+  that manages cryptographic services such as encryption and decryption using
+  the PKCS #11 standard. Also called <em>cryptographic modules</em>,
+  <em>cryptographic service providers</em>, or <em>security modules</em>,
+  PKCS #11 modules control either hardware or software devices. A PKCS #11
+  module always controls one or more slots, which may be implemented as some
+  form of physical reader (for example, for reading smart cards) or in
+  software. Each slot for a PKCS #11 module can in turn contain a
+  <a href="#security_device">security device</a> (also called <em>token</em>),
+  which is the hardware or software device that provides cryptographic services
+  and stores certificates and keys. <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate
+  Manager</a> provides two built-in PKCS #11 modules. You may install
+  additional modules on your computer to control smart card readers or other
+  hardware devices.</dd>
+
+<dt id="pki">PKI (public-key infrastructure)</dt><dd>The standards and services
+  that facilitate the use of public-key cryptography and certificates in a
+  networked environment.</dd>
+
+<dt id="plugin">plugin</dt><dd>A type of
+  <a href="#helper_application">helper application</a> that adds new
+  capabilities to your browser, such as the ability to play audio or video
+  clips. Unlike other kinds of helper applications, a plugin application
+  installs itself into the Plugins directory within the main browser
+  installation directory and typically can be opened within the browser itself
+  (internally). For example, an audio plugin lets you listen to audio files on
+  a <a href="#web_page">web page</a> or in an email message. Macromedia Flash
+  Player and Java are both examples of plugin applications.</dd>
+
+<dt id="pop">POP (Post Office Protocol)</dt><dd>A standard mail server protocol
+  that requires you to download new messages to your local
+  computer&mdash;although you can choose to leave copies on the server. With
+  POP, you can store all your messages, including sent mail, drafts, and custom
+  folders, on one computer only. By contrast,
+  <a href="#imap">IMAP</a> allows you to permanently store all your messages
+  and any changes to them on the server, where you can access them from any
+  computer. Most <a href="#isp">ISPs</a> currently support POP.</dd>
+
+<dt id="private_key">private key</dt><dd>One of a pair of
+  <a href="#key">keys</a> used in public-key cryptography. The private key is
+  kept secret and is used to decrypt data that has been encrypted with the
+  corresponding public key.</dd>
+
+<dt id="proxy">proxy</dt><dd>An intermediary or <q>go-between</q> program that
+  acts as both a <a href="#server">server</a> and a
+  <a href="#client">client</a> for the purpose of making requests on behalf of
+  other clients.</dd>
+
+<dt id="public_key">public key</dt><dd>
+  One of a pair of <a href="#key">keys</a> used in public-key cryptography.
+  The public key is distributed freely and published as part of a
+  <a href="#certificate">certificate</a>. It is typically used to encrypt data
+  sent to the public key&apos;s owner, who then decrypts the data with the
+  corresponding private key.</dd>
+
+<dt id="public-key_cryptography">public-key cryptography</dt><dd>A set of
+  well-established techniques and standards that allow an entity (such as a
+  person, an organization, or hardware such as a router) to verify its identity
+  electronically or to sign and encrypt electronic data. Two keys are involved:
+  a <a href="#public_key">public key</a> and a <a href="#private_key">private
+  key</a>. The public key is published as part of a
+  <a href="#certificate">certificate</a>, which associates that key with a
+  particular identity. The corresponding private key is kept secret. Data
+  encrypted with the public key can be decrypted only with the private key.
+  </dd>
+
+<dt id="root_ca">root CA</dt><dd>The
+  <a href="#certificate_authority">certificate authority (CA)</a> with a
+  self-signed certificate at the top of a
+  <a href="#certificate_chain">certificate chain</a>. See also
+  <a href="#subordinate_ca">subordinate CA</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="rss">RSS (Really Simple Syndication)</dt><dd>An <a href="#xml">XML</a>
+  data format for web <a href="#feed">feeds</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="search_engine">search engine</dt><dd>A web-based program that allows
+  users to search for and retrieve specific information from the
+  <a href="#world_wide_web">World Wide Web (WWW)</a>. The search engine may
+  search the full text of web documents or a list of keywords, or use
+  librarians who review web documents and index them manually for retrieval.
+  Typically, the user types a word or phrase, also called a query, into a
+  search box, and the search engine displays links to relevant web pages.</dd>
+
+<dt id="secure_authentication">secure authentication</dt><dd>A type of
+  <a href="#authentication">authentication</a> which uses a
+  <a href="#secure_connection">secure connection</a> so the communication
+  between client and server is encrypted.</dd>
+
+<dt id="secure_connection">secure connection</dt><dd>A connection between a
+  client and a server which uses some type of encryption (usually,
+  <a href="#ssl">SSL</a>) to ensure it can&apos;t be intercepted by
+  third-parties. Most of the time, the server is the one providing the
+  certificate to identify itself.</dd>
+
+<dt id="security_certificate">security certificate</dt><dd>See
+  <a href="#certificate">certificate</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="security_device">security device</dt><dd>Hardware or software that
+  provides cryptographic services such as encryption and decryption and can
+  store certificates and keys. A <a href="#smart_card">smart card</a> is one
+  example of a security device implemented in hardware.
+  <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate Manager</a> contains its own
+  built-in security device, called the
+  <a href="#software_security_device">software security device</a>, that is
+  always available while the browser is running. Each security device is
+  protected by its own <a href="#master_password">master password</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="security_module">security module</dt><dd>See
+  <a href="#pkcs_11_module">PKCS #11 module</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="security_token">security token</dt><dd>See
+  <a href="#security_device">security device</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="server">server</dt><dd>Software (such as software that serves up web
+  pages) that receives requests from and sends information to a
+  <a href="#client">client</a>, which is usually running on a different
+  computer. A computer on which server software runs is also described as a
+  server.</dd>
+
+<dt id="server_authentication">server authentication</dt><dd>The process of
+  identifying a <a href="#server">server</a> to a <a href="#client">client</a>
+  by using a <a href="#server_ssl_certificate">server SSL certificate</a>. See
+  also <a href="#client_authentication">client authentication</a>,
+  <a href="#ssl">SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="server_ssl_certificate">server SSL certificate</dt><dd>A
+  certificate that a <a href="#server">server</a> presents to a
+  <a href="#client">client</a> to authenticate the server&apos;s identity using
+  the <a href="#ssl">SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)</a> protocol.</dd>
+
+<dt id="signing_certificate">signing certificate</dt><dd>A certificate whose
+  corresponding <a href="#private_key">private key</a> is used to sign
+  transmitted data, so that the receiver can verify the identity of the sender.
+  Certificate authorities (CAs) often issue a signing certificate that will be
+  used to sign email messages at the same time as an
+  <a href="#encryption_certificate">encryption certificate</a> that will be
+  used to encrypt email messages. See also <a href="#dual_key_pairs">dual key
+  pairs</a>, <a href="#digital_signature">digital signature</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="signing_key">signing key</dt><dd>A private key used for signing only.
+  A signing key and its equivalent public key, together with an
+  <a href="#encryption_key">encryption key</a> and its equivalent private key,
+  constitute <a href="#dual_key_pairs">dual key pairs</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="slot">slot</dt><dd>A piece of hardware, or its equivalent in software,
+  that is controlled by a <a href="#pkcs_11_module">PKCS #11 module</a> and
+  designed to contain a <a href="#security_device">security device</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="smart_card">smart card</dt><dd>A small device, typically about the size
+  of a credit card, that contains a microprocessor and is capable of storing
+  cryptographic information (such as keys and certificates) and performing
+  cryptographic operations. Smart cards use the <a href="#pkcs_11">PKCS #11</a>
+  standard. A smart card is one kind of <a href="#security_device">security
+  device</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="smtp">SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)</dt><dd>A protocol that
+  sends email messages across the <a href="#internet">Internet</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="socks">SOCKS</dt><dd>A protocol that a <a href="#proxy">proxy</a>
+  server can use to accept requests from client users in an internal network
+  so that it can forward them across the <a href="#internet">Internet</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="software_security_device">software security device</dt><dd>The default
+  <a href="#security_device">security device</a> used by
+  <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate Manager</a> to store private keys
+  associated with your certificates. In addition to private keys, the software
+  security device stores the master key used by
+  <a href="#password_manager">Password Manager</a> to encrypt email passwords,
+  website passwords, and other sensitive information. See also
+  <a href="#private_key">private key</a> and <a href="#master_password">master
+  key</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="spoofing">spoofing</dt><dd>Pretending to be someone else. For example,
+  a person can pretend to have the email address <tt>jdoe@mozilla.com</tt>, or
+  a computer can identify itself as a website called <tt>www.mozilla.com</tt>
+  when it is not. Spoofing is one form of
+  <a href="#misrepresentation">misrepresentation</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="ssl">SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)</dt><dd>A protocol that allows mutual
+  authentication between a <a href="#client">client</a> and a
+  <a href="#server">server</a> for the purpose of establishing an authenticated
+  and encrypted connection. SSL runs above <a href="#tcp_ip">TCP/IP</a> and
+  below <a href="#http">HTTP</a>, <a href="#ldap">LDAP</a>,
+  <a href="#imap">IMAP</a>, NNTP, and other high-level network protocols.
+  The new Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard called Transport
+  Layer Security (TLS) is based on SSL. See also
+  <a href="#authentication">authentication</a>,
+  <a href="#encryption">encryption</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="starttls">STARTTLS</dt><dd>An extension to common standard TCP
+  protocols (like SMTP, POP or IMAP) so the client can tell the server to
+  use <a href="#tls">TLS</a> on the same TCP port as for non-secure
+  connections.</dd>
+
+<dt id="status_bar">Status Bar</dt><dd>The toolbar that appears at the bottom
+  of any &brandShortName; window. It includes the
+  <a href="#component_bar">Component Bar</a> on the left and status icons on
+  the right.</dd>
+
+<dt id="subject">subject</dt><dd>The entity (such as a person, organization,
+  or router) identified by a <a href="#certificate">certificate</a>. In
+  particular, the subject field of a certificate contains the certified
+  entity&apos;s <a href="#subject_name">subject name</a> and other
+  characteristics.</dd>
+
+<dt id="subject_name">subject name</dt><dd>A
+  <a href="#distinguished_name">distinguished name (DN)</a> that uniquely
+  describes the <a href="#subject">subject</a> of a
+  <a href="#certificate">certificate</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="subordinate_ca">subordinate CA</dt><dd>A
+  <a href="#certificate_authority">certificate authority (CA)</a> whose
+  certificate is signed by another subordinate CA or by the root CA. See also
+  <a href="#certificate_chain">certificate chain</a>, <a href="#root_ca">root
+  CA</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="symmetric_encryption">symmetric encryption</dt><dd>An encryption method
+  that uses a single cryptographic key to both encrypt and decrypt a given
+  message.</dd>
+
+<dt id="tamper_detection">tamper detection</dt><dd>A mechanism ensuring that
+  data received in electronic form has not been tampered with; that is, that
+  the data received corresponds entirely with the original version of the same
+  data.</dd>
+
+<dt id="tcp">TCP</dt><dd>See <a href="#tcp_ip">TCP/IP</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="tcp_ip">TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
+  Protocol)</dt><dd>A Unix protocol used to connect computers running a variety
+  of operating systems. TCP/IP is an essential Internet protocol and has become
+  a global standard.</dd>
+
+<dt id="theme">theme</dt><dd>A type of <a href="#add-on">add-on</a> that changes
+  the appearance of &brandShortName;.</dd>
+
+<dt id="third-party_cookie">third-party cookie</dt><dd>See
+  <a href="#foreign_cookie">foreign cookie</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="tls">TLS</dt><dd>Transport Layer Security (TLS) is the new Internet
+  Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard based on SSL (Secure Sockets Layer).
+  See also <a href="#ssl">SSL</a> and
+  <a href="#encryption">encryption</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="token">token</dt><dd>See <a href="#security_device">security
+  device</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="tooltip">tooltip</dt><dd>A small box with text that appears when
+  you hover your mouse's cursor over certain items. It usually contains
+  information regarding the item being hovered over.</dd>
+
+<dt id="trust">trust</dt><dd>Confident reliance on a person or other entity. In
+  the context of <a href="#pki">PKI (public-key infrastructure)</a>, trust
+  usually refers to the relationship between the user of a certificate and the
+  <a href="#certificate_authority">certificate authority (CA)</a> that issued
+  the certificate. If you use Certificate Manager to specify that you trust a
+  CA, Certificate Manager trusts valid certificates issued by that CA unless
+  you specify otherwise in the settings for individual certificates. You use
+  the Authorities tab in Certificate Manager to specify the kinds of
+  certificates you do or don&apos;t trust specific CAs to issue.</dd>
+
+<dt id="url">URL (Uniform Resource Locator)</dt><dd>The standardized address
+  that tells your browser how to locate a file or other resource on the Web.
+  For example: <tt>http://www.mozilla.org.</tt> You can type URLs into the
+  browser&apos;s <a href="#location_bar">Location Bar</a> to access
+  <a href="#web_page">web pages</a>. URLs are also used in the links on web
+  pages that you can click to go to other web pages. Also known as an Internet
+  address or Web address.</dd>
+
+<dt id="web_page">web page</dt><dd>A single document on the World Wide Web that
+  is specified by a unique address or <a href="#url">URL</a> and that may
+  contain text, hyperlinks, and graphics.</dd>
+
+<dt id="web_site">website</dt><dd>A group of related web pages linked by
+  hyperlinks and managed by a single company, organization, or individual. A
+  website may include text, graphics, audio and video files, and links to
+  other websites.</dd>
+
+<dt id="world_wide_web">World Wide Web (WWW)</dt><dd>Also known as the Web. A
+  portion of the <a href="#internet">Internet</a> that is made up of web pages
+  stored by web <a href="#server">servers</a> and displayed by
+  <a href="#client">clients</a> called web browsers (such as
+  &brandShortName;).</dd>
+
+<dt id="wpad">WPAD (Web Proxy AutoDiscovery)</dt><dd>A proposed Internet
+  protocol that allows a Web browser to automatically locate and interface
+  with <a href="#proxy">proxy</a> services in a network.</dd>
+
+<dt id="xml">XML (Extensible Markup Language)</dt><dd>An open standard for
+  describing data. Unlike <a href="#html">HTML</a>, XML allows the developer of
+  a web page to define special tags. For more information, see the online W3C
+  document
+  <a href="http://www.w3.org/XML/">Extensible Markup Language (XML)</a>.</dd>
+
+<dt id="xslt">XSLT (Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation)</dt><dd>A
+  language used to convert an XML document into another XML document or into
+  some other format.</dd>
+
+<dt id="xul">XUL (XML User Interface Language)</dt><dd>A XML markup language
+  for creating user interfaces in applications.</dd>
+
+</dl>
+
+</body>
+</html>
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/help-glossary.rdf
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+<?xml version="1.0"?>
+
+<rdf:RDF xmlns:rdf="http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#"
+         xmlns:nc="http://home.netscape.com/NC-rdf#">
+
+<!--  HELP Glossary SECTION -->
+  <rdf:Description about="urn:root">
+    <nc:subheadings>
+      <rdf:Seq>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="add-on" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#add-on"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="authentication" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#authentication"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="bookmark" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#bookmark"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="CA" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#ca"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="CA certificate" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#ca_certificate"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="cache" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#cache"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="caret browsing" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#caret_browsing"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="certificate" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#certificate"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="certificate authority (CA)" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="certificate backup password" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#certificate_backup_password"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="certificate-based authentication" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#certificate-based_authentication"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="certificate chain" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#certificate_chain"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="certificate fingerprint" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#certificate_fingerprint"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="Certificate Manager" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#certificate_manager"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="certificate renewal" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#certificate_renewal"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="certificate verification" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#certificate_verification"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="cipher" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#cipher"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="client" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#client"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="client authentication" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#client_authentication"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="client SSL certificate" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#client_ssl_certificate"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="Component Bar" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#component_bar"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="cookie" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#cookie"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="Cookie Manager" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#cookie_manager"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="CRL" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#crl"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="cryptographic algorithm" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#cryptographic_algorithm"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="cryptography" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#cryptography"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="decryption" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#decryption"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="digital ID" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#digital_id"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="digital signature" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#digital_signature"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="distinguished name (DN)" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#distinguished_name"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="dual key pairs" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#dual_key_pairs"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="eavesdropping" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#eavesdropping"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="encryption" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#encryption"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="encryption certificate" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#encryption_certificate"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="encryption key" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#encryption_key"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="extension" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#extension"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="feed" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#feed"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="fingerprint" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#fingerprint"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="FIPS PUBS 140-1" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#fips_pubs_140-1"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="foreign cookie" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#foreign_cookie"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="frame" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#frame"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="FTP" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#ftp"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="helper application" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#helper_application"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="home page" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#home_page"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="HTML" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#html"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="HTTP" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#http"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="HTTPS" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#https"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="IMAP" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#imap"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="implicit consent" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#implicit_consent"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="Internet" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#internet"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="IP address" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#ip_address"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="IRC" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#irc"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="ISP" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#isp"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="Java" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#java"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="JavaScript" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#javascript"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="key" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#key"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="LDAP" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#ldap"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="language pack" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#language_pack"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="Location Bar" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#location_bar"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="master key" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#master_key"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="master password" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#master_password"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="misrepresentation" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#misrepresentation"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="Navigation Toolbar" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#navigation_toolbar"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="nonrepudiation" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#nonrepudiation"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="notification bar" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#notification_bar"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="object signing" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#object_signing"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="object-signing certificate" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#object-signing_certificate"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="OCSP" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#ocsp"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="OPML" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#opml"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="password-based authentication" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#password-based_authentication"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="Password Manager" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#password_manager"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="Personal Toolbar" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#personal_toolbar"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="phishing" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#phishing"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="PKCS #11" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#pkcs_11"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="PKCS #11 module" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#pkcs_11_module"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="PKI" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#pki"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="plugin" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#plugin"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="POP" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#pop"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="private key" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#private_key"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="proxy" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#proxy"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="public key" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#public_key"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="public-key cryptography" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#public-key_cryptography"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="root CA" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#root_ca"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="RSS" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#rss"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="search engine" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#search_engine"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="secure authentication" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#secure_authentication"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="secure connection" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#secure_connection"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="security certificate" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#security_certificate"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="security device" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#security_device"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="security module" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#security_module"/> </rdf:li>
+        <rdf:li> <rdf:Description nc:name="security token" nc:link="glossary.xhtml#security_token"/> </rdf:li>
+